Ian Cullen's Comic Reviews

Reviewer For: SciFiPulse Reviews: 1220
9.5Avg. Review Rating

9.5
007: For King and Country #1

Apr 22, 2023

Overall this is a fun read and I quite like where it could be going in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
007: For King and Country #2

May 28, 2023

Why has M sent 006 to bring Bond on and not 009? Will we see Bond reconnect with M in a forthcoming issue? Those are just some of the questions that I am pondering about this book.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
007: For King and Country #3

Jul 4, 2023

I'm continuing to enjoy where this story is going and can't wait for the next issue to come out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
007: For King and Country #4

Aug 23, 2023

The StoryHaving gone to Washington in order to get some help from his CIA contact Felix. Bond has a chance encounter with 005 who claims that again Gann 002 was second in command of Myrmidon and cannot be trusted. Having no other evidence to prove this. Bond has to do a little digging himself and is starting to wonder about who he can and can't trust. Things escalate somewhat when Agent Clark is nearly captured by Myrmidon.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
007: For King and Country #5

Oct 11, 2023

This penultimate issue leaves a few plot threads concerning Bond's future in the wind. But am sure some of it will get resolved in the final issue, which will hit comic stores next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
007: For King and Country #6

Dec 8, 2023

Philip Kennedy Johnson wraps this story up beautifully and leaves a few threads open so that Gann can potentially make a return at some future date. I loved the themes and tropes that Johnson used to tell this story. Nanotech and other technologies that have the potential to allow one person to play god is of huge concern as is A.I. in general. So this book story is one that I feel many fans will likely be discussing for some time to come. The topics and themes within the story are very much mirroring many of the discussions that have been happening in the world's media for quite some time. Bond's decision in the end was as much for the rest of the world as it was for England.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Absolute Batman (2024) #1

Oct 11, 2024

This is a solid first issue that does a good job of setting the story up. I enjoyed the book but am curious as to how this more working-class version of Bruce Wayne has managed to fund all of his studies as well as all of the hardware that he uses. Obviously there are a few clues as to how this has worked as we get references to Oswald Cobblepot and we also meet Killer Crock who runs the gym where Bruce Works out at. Quite how Cobblepot and other well-known Batman villains will get used in this alternative story as yet remains to be seen, but it will be interesting to find out if they best guesses about them will turn out to be true.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Absolute Batman (2024) #2

Nov 16, 2024

This second issue builds brilliantly on the characters and themes introduced in the opening book. I love how we're seeing Bruce Wayne grappling with survivor's guilt, which adds an extra layer of complexity to his decision to become Batman. He blames himself for his father's death, believing that if he hadn't won the science fair, they never would have visited the zoo where Joe Chill killed his father.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Absolute Superman (2024) #1

Nov 10, 2024

Overall, Jason Aaron's alternative take on Superman shows real promise and might feel more relatable to fans like myself who've often found Superman a bit overpowered compared to other heroes. Personally, I've always enjoyed the more grounded heroes, like Batman, who rely on technology, training, and cleverness to overcome villains and challenges.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Absolute Superman (2024) #2

Dec 8, 2024

Overall, this is a solid second issue that continues to develop both character and plot effectively, with enough intrigue to keep readers engaged.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Absolute Wonder Woman (2024) #1

Oct 28, 2024

Over time we see the Witch raise Diana as her own child and when she comes of age the Witch tells Diana about Apollo bringing her to hell and not wanting her to know about her heritage. Now Diana has come down to Earth on her Zombie horse named Pegasus and embraces her job of protecting the world from the worst that Hell has to offer as she looks to reclaim the word Amazon and her true heritage.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Absolute Wonder Woman (2024) #2

Dec 1, 2024

Visually, I loved the action beats at the start of the book, which were dynamic and engaging. The slow build-up to the reveal at the end also kept the tension high and made for a satisfying conclusion to the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Adler #1

Feb 4, 2020

I'm looking forward to seeing what issue two has to offer next month because this is a really strong start.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Adler #2

May 25, 2020

As far as plot twists go. There's a few being set up. This issue alone gives us a few more classic characters from the period. One of which is a certain gentleman calling himself Jack who suspiciously looks like a rather young David Warner.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Adler #3

Aug 20, 2020

I hope it's not too much of a long wait for issue 4 because I'm really enjoying this book and would love to see it as a movie someday.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Adler #4

Oct 13, 2020

Overall. This book continues to be the main event on my monthly calendar.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Adler #5

Nov 3, 2020

I'm giving this full marks across the board and hope to get hold of a trade copy of the whole story in graphic novel form.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Adventureman (2020) #1

Jun 16, 2020

A promising start to what looks like it may be a good pulp-style story. My only criticism is that Claire's meal with her family dragged on a little, but perhaps that was the point. Matt Fraction has something pretty cool brewing here. I'm ready for my second serving.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Adventureman (2020) #2

Jul 12, 2020

The team of Rachel and Terry Dodson continue to do great work in the art department.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Adventureman (2020) #3

Aug 18, 2020

The part of the story where Claire has lost time and is being examined by the Doctor proved to be quite interesting in that she suddenly has her hearing back in one ear and has grown a bit taller. It will be fun to see what this is going to go in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Adventureman (2020) #4

Oct 15, 2020

OverallMatt Fraction is giving us a wildly fun pulp adventure story with a likable character. I loved the sequence at the end where Claire's son tells the rest of the family how they will be able to find his mother. I loved how he explained Adventureman's Thought Surge.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Adventureman (2020) #5

Oct 5, 2021

"TO THE GREATEST UNKNOWN" does a fantastic job of trying up one story arc and sawing the seeds to start a newer story. Thankfully, we'll not have to be waiting quite as long for the next issue. But that said this particular issue was well worth the wait as I had very nearly forgotten that I had subscribed to this book. Especially given that Covid and various other considerations had delayed its release by a whole year.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Adventureman (2020) #6

Nov 2, 2021

A really funny and festive opening for what I am sure will be a fun short story, which will wrap up in next month's issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Adventureman (2020) #7

Dec 19, 2021

Matt Fraction giving us a ghost Adventureman story this close to Christmas is genius. The artwork continues to work really well with Fractions narrative and the colours and visuals continue to look very much like an old 30s pulp series, but set in the modern-day. Additionally, this issue is a wonderful introduction for the cowboy hero Champion Strong, who I am hoping we'll see more of in the months ahead.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Amazing Spider-Man (2022) #61

Nov 23, 2024

Doom enlists Spider-Man as his champion, tasking him with battling an ancient god and its seven scions to protect Earth from supernatural threats. At first, Spider-Man flat-out refuses. But he quickly learns he has little choice, as Doom has already put his plan in motion. Armed with magical armor and an assortment of enchanted tools, Spider-Man has no choice but to face this otherworldly challenge.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Amazing Spider-Man (2022) #62

Dec 2, 2024

Overall, I enjoyed this issue and look forward to the release of the third book in the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Amazing Spider-Man (2022) #63

Dec 16, 2024

Overall, this is a solid issue that delivers a powerful punch, leaving you wondering if Spidey can recover. With three lives already spent, he's down to just five. How will Spidey overcome this formidable third Scion? I guess we'll have to wait and see in the next installment.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
American Gods: Shadows #1

Apr 24, 2017

I enjoyed the comics story and the art work was of good enough standard that it showed you what you needed to see without pulling you out of the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
American Gods: Shadows #3

May 23, 2017

Much like last issue. It is surprising me just how different the comic book adaptation is to the TV series and how events seem to happen in a different order.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
American Gods: Shadows #4

Jun 23, 2017

I now look forward to issue five, which will likely feature Shadow and Mr. Wednesday's bank robbery and will be followed up with their meeting with the new gods.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
American Jesus: The New Messiah #2

Jan 21, 2020

American Jesus #2 will be out in all good comics stores on Wednesday 22 January.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
American Jesus: The New Messiah #3

Feb 18, 2020

If I have any criticism of this book. It is that we haven't really seen too much in this story from the opposite side of the fence as to the kind of upbringing the Messiah's opposite number had and how he or she has been living their life. I guess the writer is saving all of that for later issues. Either way, it would be cool to see that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
American Mythology: Monsters (2021) #1

Jan 23, 2021

Overall. ‘American Mythology Monsters' is a fun reinterpretation of the classic Universal Monster movies from the 1930s. The artwork is pretty good for a black and white book and allows you to fill in the colors with your own imagination. Out of the three stories. I found ‘Bite' to offer the most interesting reinterpretation whereas ‘Safiya' was the most visually interesting.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Anno Dracula 1895: Seven Days in Mayhem #1

Mar 20, 2017

It is my hope that this series proves successful for Titan Comics because it allows new readers to experience what readers of the novels did.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Army of Darkness/Xena: Warrior Princess #1

Sep 27, 2016

Overall though. This is a fun first issue, which does a superlative job of capturing the spirit of both Xena Warrior Princess and Ash and Army Of Darkness. I look foreword to seeing how things pan out in the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Assault on Fortress Doom #1

Apr 10, 2018

If you're looking for some pulpy fun to read. It is part tribute to the soldiers that fought during the second world war as well as a loving homage to Pulp stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Avatar (2019): Adapt or Die #1

May 16, 2022

Overall. A really strong start to a story, which I hope will gain momentum and strength as the series progresses.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Avatar (2019): Adapt or Die #2

Jun 7, 2022

Overall a solid story and thought-provoking story, which is an example of the types of stories that classic science fiction can tell. I.E. it's not simply a good guys and bad guys kind of story. But a lot more nuanced.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Avatar (2019): Adapt or Die #3

Jul 12, 2022

OverallThis story continues to move along at a satisfying pace. The events of a virus taking out the indigenous life on Pandora is somewhat similar to what happened to many Native American tribes when the European settlers made America their home. Bringing with them strains of many viruses and diseases that the Native tribes had no immunity to. The interplay between Moat and Eytukan provides the backbone of this story as Eytukan's anti-human views give him some compelling arguments. We also have some nice moments between Grace and Selfridge as the latter says that the disease could well make his job easier. Of course, Grace isn't too impressed with Selfridge's attitude.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Back to the Future #11

Aug 31, 2016

Having spent pretty much the whole weekend reading all 11 issues of this comic. I am now wanting to have more ‘Back To The Future' and the odd conundrum or two for Marty and Doc to solve. Which is something that seems to be happening as IDW continues on to the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Back to the Future #12

Sep 30, 2016

As a regular reader of this series. I'm hoping that this is truly a one shot because I'd like to get back to the time travelling.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Back to the Future #16

Feb 7, 2017

I only hope that they do not kill of Irving. He makes for a more interesting enemy that Biff or anything that we have seen thus far in this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Back to the Future #17

Mar 2, 2017

This has been a wonderful arc. Amust have for those that buy the trade paperbacks.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Back to the Future #18

Apr 25, 2017

Overall this is a fun story with lots of fun references, but it only really works as a bit of filler as in a one shot to buy us some time until the comics next big story arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Back to the Future #19

May 16, 2017

A really enjoyable read and not even the tiniest hint of time travel thus far.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Back to the Future #20

Jul 3, 2017

Over all this is a great second issue in the Hard Time story arc and I look forward to next months issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Back to the Future #21

Jul 27, 2017

Given that we know so little about uncle Joey from the films. This comic book series has done a fabulous job of filling in some of those blanks.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Back to the Future #22

Aug 22, 2017

IDW, Bob Gale and John Barber are doing some really cool stuff here.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Back to the Future #24

Oct 27, 2017

I'm really looking forward to the next issue to find out how this arc will conclude.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Back to the Future #25

Dec 15, 2017

Overall. This was a great ending for the mystery surrounding Joe Baines and a great launch point for a new adventure, which we'll see at some stage next year.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Back to the Future: Citizen Brown #4

Sep 8, 2016

The art work byAlan Robinson is fantastic. I love the alternate dress code of 1986B and its a load of fun seeing Marty's girlfriend Jennifer in full punk rock regalia. But its the scenes set in the 30's that really show off Robinson's work here. His attention to detail and the specalative look of Doc's invention of the flying car is brilliant fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Bang! #1

Feb 25, 2020

OverallA promising start to what feels like a wild and crazy spy adventure. The main character is introduced to us on a burned page of a novel before we see him in the comic and the story is pure science fiction pulp from start to cliffhanger. I am curious and probably inclined to hit subscribe on this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Bang! #2

Mar 22, 2020

Matt Kindt delivers a really solid second issue, which links things up with events in the first issue as the last few pages see John meet up with Agent Chord. I loved the cheeky references to 'Die Hard' with some of the dialogue and am really loving the over the top nature of the spy story. The inhalers that Shaw gets put me in mind of the Superdrug that was depicted in 'Limitless'. I really want to see this made into a TV show or a movie. It is that much fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bang! #3

Sep 7, 2020

Overall. A great introduction for Dr. Queen. I look forward to the issue where Chord, Queen, and Shaw start to work together, which hopefully will be coming up in the October issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bang! #4

Oct 14, 2020

A fun issue, which really appealed to the Agatha Christie fan within me.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bang! #5

Nov 10, 2020

Move along James Bond. I would like me some more Bang!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Barbarella (2017) #1

Dec 4, 2017

Overall. I'm probably in for another issue to see how it goes. Overall it is pretty true to the Barbarella character and visual goes a little further than the movie could ever go.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Barbarella (2017): Holiday Special #1

Dec 3, 2018

This is a fun read, but when compared to Dynamites very first issue of Barbarella, which I covered months ago. This is a much cleaner story in that it has been toned down, which is not a bad thing given that its a holiday special, which means it needs to be a bit more inclusive.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Batman / Dylan Dog (2024) #1

Mar 19, 2024

One of the highlights is when we see Joking using Xabaras's lab to make zombie jokers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Batman / Dylan Dog (2024) #2

Apr 15, 2024

Roberto Recchioni continues to spin an intriguing story making great use of Batman and Dylan Dog. The dialogue between the two protagonists is sharp and very much in line with what we know of their characters. The addition of the Demon Etrigan made way for some fun rhymes whereas John Constantine allowed the writer to create an interesting bit of conversation between Dog and Constantine about how things are versus the way they are now.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Batman / Dylan Dog (2024) #3

Jun 29, 2024

This has been a great crossover and I would not be apposed to seeing more crossover stories between these two characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Batman / Santa Claus: Silent Knight (2023): Returns #1

Nov 30, 2024

Jeff Parker delivers a festive sequel to last year's Silent Knight storyline. I loved how he managed to include so many members of the Justice League while giving Santa Claus a fantastic entrance. It was great to see characters like Mera, Nubia, Constantine, and Zatanna make an appearance. I'm excited to see how much of a role they'll play in the story and can't wait to find out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Batman / Santa Claus: Silent Knight (2023): Returns #2

Dec 9, 2024

The combination of Parker's writing and the artwork makes this book a captivating read, and I'm hookedeagerly anticipating the next issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Batman / Santa Claus: Silent Knight (2023): Returns #3

Dec 15, 2024

A fun issue that gradually builds towards the conclusion of Batman and the JLA's time in the Hollow Kingdom as Santa comes to their rescue. That said, I'm actually enjoying Zatanna and Robin's part in this story a bit more than Batman and the JLA's storyline.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #1

Mar 21, 2022

Mark Waid delivers a fantastic first issue. I'm always up for seeing Superman get savagely beaten up. But for me, it is the addition of The Doom Patrol that really makes this book. Waid makes brilliant use of Negative Man's powers in order to help Batman contain an out-of-control Superman. I can't wait to see what happens in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #2

Apr 25, 2022

Overall. A fun read and thus far a fairly strong team-up story for DCs two most popular heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #3

May 24, 2022

For me personally. The best part of this issue is the sequence where The House of Ji explains how they defeated Nezha the first time. The words for this sequence worked brilliantly with Mora's artwork.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #4

Jun 28, 2022

So things are looking pretty grim for our heroes as Supergirl delivers some disturbing news. I can't wait to find out what will happen in the next issue and learn who our heroes will have to sacrifice in order to defeat Nezha. I mean could there be a workaround such as making a superhero clone. You know pitting science against magic? I guess we'll learn more in next month's installment.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #5

Jul 23, 2022

This was a lot of fun. And the next story arc in which the team will go after Robin already has me pretty excited at the possibilities.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #6

Aug 23, 2022

Mark Waid gives us a pretty solid but simple mystery for Robin to solve, which kicks off this new story arc. I really loved how he had Robin describing his love of the circus at the beginning of the book. I also loved how well-written the various characters were and the panel where Superman gets hit on by the circus cook was pretty fun. Overall, this is a good start to the new story arc and could almost work as a one-shot style story if we did not know that there was more to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #7

Oct 3, 2022

Things get kind of interesting when David exhibits powers that are a side effect of his Earth having a less powerful sun. In order to help assimilate David into this new Earth Superman agrees to train him while Robin introduces him to the Titans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #8

Oct 24, 2022

OverallThis is a really fun and interesting story and the focus on David AKA Boy Thunder and his superhero journey give us an insight into topics such as mental health and anxiety. I loved the sequence in which Supergirl tells her story to Boy Thunder in an effort to ease his mind about his own anxiety as he is blaming himself for the loss of his own Earth. The question is. Was he the cause of the destruction of his own world? Or was it something else?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #9

Nov 27, 2022

I can't wait to see where this story goes when the next issue is released next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #10

Dec 27, 2022

Mark Waid does a great job of the panels where Joker and The Key are working together to try and get information out of Boy Thunder via torture and other means. I loved the conversation that Boy Thunder has with The Key in which the villain pretty much gives us his origin story in a few short paragraphs when he talks about the fact that human beings only use about 10 percent of their brains.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Batman Beyond: Neo-Gothic (2023) #1

Jul 30, 2023

All that said. I really enjoyed this opening issue and I'm fully on board to find out what happens as Terry goes deeper into Under Gotham to investigate the missing kids.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Batman Beyond: Neo-Gothic (2023) #2

Aug 25, 2023

OverallA really fun issue that does a great job of moving the story forward and ends with a big reveal about who the tomb belongs too.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Batman: Curse of the White Knight #5

Dec 15, 2019

A fantastic issue, which sees Batman doe some real detective work. I love the fact that this is all wrapped up around something that his ancestors did years ago. It adds proper emotional weight and high stakes if Batman or Bruce do not handle things the right way. I'm also quite enjoying the character of Azrael and his penchant for religious quotes. Not to mention his flaming sword.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Batman: Curse of the White Knight #6

Jan 26, 2020

I look forward to the next issue to find out more. The whole history of Edmund Wayne and everything that involves is really interesting and fun to read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Batman: Curse of the White Knight #7

Mar 3, 2020

A really good book, which sets things up beautifully for the coming fight with Azrael.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Batman: Curse of the White Knight #8

Apr 6, 2020

OverallThis final issue wraps up the story quite nicely and sees Bruce Wayne taking responsibility for the actions of his family many years in the past is pretty much a given. It was the panels that led up to that. Such as the few panels in which Harley Quinn tries to talk Bruce out of giving himself over to the Gotham PD. The final panels of this leave things open for more adventures to come, but the conclusion of this story changes everything for the life of Bruce Wayne and Batman.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Batman: Curse of the White Knight: Von Freeze #1

Nov 26, 2019

OverallSean Murphy delivers a solid story here, which will both entertain and educate. I really loved the segment at the very close of the book where we meet the White Knight version of Batman during a visit to an older Victor Fries. But it is the story within the story about Victor's father the Baron and his surrogate father Jacob, which will melt even the iciest of hearts.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Battlestar Galactica Vs. Battlestar Galactica #1

Jan 2, 2018

Overall. A really promising start to what looks like being one hell of a great story. BSG vs BSG will hit comics stores on Wednesday of next week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Battlestar Galactica Vs. Battlestar Galactica #3

Mar 22, 2018

A crossover between the original Battlestar Galactica crew and the Re-imagined crew was always going to present fun and interesting ideas. But you have to wonder if some of those ideas are perhaps left as just ideas and not allowed to germinate beyond that.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Battlestar Galactica Vs. Battlestar Galactica #4

Apr 23, 2018

Overall. Despite my issues with the artwork. This is a case of a damn good story taking shape. I love the fact that Iblis has come into play here and wonder how long it will be before the ship of lights shows up. This issue has a few shocking moments and sees one of the Adama's acting very much out of character.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Battlestar Galactica Vs. Battlestar Galactica #5

May 16, 2018

Once again. If your looking for the artwork to be representative of the characters from both television shows. Don't hold your breath. Johnny Desjardins characterizations are more his interpretation than they are accurate and it can be a bit jarring. So best to keep your expectations fairly low because the only characters he has anywhere close to how they are supposed to look are those characters from the re-imagined universe and even then it is hit and miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Battlestar Galactica Vs. Battlestar Galactica #6

Jun 19, 2018

To sum up. This will likely be worth having in trade paperback when it gets released, but it is more of a fun item to have in your Battlestar Galactica collection.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Battlestar Galactica: Classic #0

Oct 1, 2018

As a child of the 70's and 80's I'm loving this and I'm definitelysigned up for the whole story. This to me is the Battlestar Galacticaof my youth and not the gritty and nihilistic take on the series, which was so popular in the early 2000's. You can get your copy of this first issue for Free from Comixology and elsewhere. It's definitelyworth a look if you feel nostalgic for the more family-friendlyversion of Battlestar Galactica.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Battlestar Galactica: Classic #1

Nov 13, 2018

Overall. This new comic book run feels very much like it could well have been an original episode from the Classic Battlestar Galactica series. I want more of the same, please. Bring on issue 3.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Battlestar Galactica: Classic #2

Dec 10, 2018

This issue will hit comic book stores on Wednesday, December 12. If you're a Classic Galactica fan. This is a must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Battlestar Galactica: Classic #3

Jan 14, 2019

I am continuing to enjoy this series and hope Dynamite plan to make this an ongoing series because this Classic Battlestar Galactica fan would be very happy if they do.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Battlestar Galactica: Classic #4

May 14, 2019

I really enjoyed the relationship that Adama builds with the Comitat, which builds up to a really dramatic closing page. I look forward to issue 5 whenever it drops. Hopefully, the wait will not be too long.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Betsy Braddock: Captain Britain (2023) #1

Feb 28, 2023

Once again Tini Howard gives us a rather complex and nuanced storyline, which has multiple twists being set up. I love the fact that we are likely to see a bit more of S.T.R.I.K.E. as Betsy has called upon them in order to help here get to the bottom of what is going on with the Furies.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Betsy Braddock: Captain Britain (2023) #2

Apr 8, 2023

OverallOverall. A solid continuation of the story that kicked off last month. I loved the decision to bring Captain Carter and Lizzie Braddock into the story. As I loved the solo Captain Carter comic series that introduced their characters to us last year. I look forward to seeing how well Captain Carter and Betsy Braddock work together in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Betsy Braddock: Captain Britain (2023) #3

May 1, 2023

Tired and fast running out of options. Bettsy begins to realize that she is going to need some outside help in order to help her and her people defend the country from the nefarious plans of Morgan Le Fay.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Betsy Braddock: Captain Britain (2023) #4

Jun 6, 2023

This penultimate issue does a fantastic job of foreshadowing what is to come but does so in such a way that it gives very little away. I loved the family meeting at the close of the issue and some of the questions that the Braddock family was pondering. Especially where it concerns how they can fight Morgan Le Fay and do it in such a way that they do not endanger the country or pull Europe into another war.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Betsy Braddock: Captain Britain (2023) #5

Jun 26, 2023

This is a satisfying conclusion to the story arc, but it looks like it could well likely lead into a future arc as I don't think Betsy's solution is as elegant as she thinks it might be. I loved how S.T.R.I.K.E. was used in this issue. But for me, the best inclusion was seeing Faiza Hussain get a good role as she is a character that Paul Cornell introduced to the Marvel Universe via his run on Captain Britain and is a character that I don't think we've seen enough of.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Bettie Page #1

Jul 18, 2017

Having Bettie Page be a secret agents is a master stroke and it works really well as a concept. I really enjoyed this first issue, which tells a somewhat self contained story to introduce the characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Bettie Page #2

Aug 21, 2017

The reveal at the end of the book feels very 1930's movie serial in that you will find yourself anxiously wanting to know what will happen in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bettie Page #3

Sep 26, 2017

With the cliffhanger ending being far more exciting this issue. I can't wait to find out how Betty and Druke escape.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Bettie Page #4

Nov 2, 2017

The colors were fantastic and the humor of Betty having to strip down to her swimwear in order to escape the flying saucer was pretty much expected, but not half as much fun without the dramatic build up. With just one issue left to go. I shudder to think of what Avallone might come up with next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Bettie Page #5

Nov 22, 2017

I look forward to seeing what is in store for issue six where we may just find out who was behind the giant scorpions.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Bettie Page #6

Dec 11, 2017

This issue will drop at all comic stores a week on Wednesday.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Bettie Page #7

Jan 16, 2018

Overall. Another fantastic issue. Hopefully, there are loads more to come in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Bettie Page #8

Feb 23, 2018

This has been a fantastic monthlycomic, which I am going to miss now that it is at an end. Hopefully, David Avallone will come up with another caper for Bettie and her friendsto figure out at a later date.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Bettie Page: Halloween Special #1

Oct 23, 2018

OverallAn enjoyable read and a reminder that I cannot have enough Bettie Page comic book stories in my life. I was really impressed with what Leah Williams did with so little space to fill and Dave Avallone continues to impress with his knack for being able to write a pulp story and create dialogue that fits specific time periods.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Bettie Page (2018) #1

Nov 19, 2018

OverallA solid opening issue, which sets the ball rolling on another bunch of adventures for Bettie Page. I'm looking forward to seeing where David Avallone will take this in future issues. I really enjoyed how we got a brief callback to the Halloween issue, which was released last month and I really appreciated how fast we got into the adventure. I look forward to seeing what Bettie thinks of the English dessert known as Spotted Dick. If indeed she has time for such trivial pursuits.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bettie Page (2018) #2

Feb 11, 2019

Most of all though. It is the way the mystery of this book is set up. It very much feels like a 1930s and 40s movie serial with the cliffhanger ending, which keeps you on the edge of your seat. I can't wait for issue 3.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Bettie Page (2018) #3

Apr 9, 2019

My only complaint is the lettering. In the panels where Bettie is wearing the helmet. It is barely visible due to the fact that her voice sounds lower. The letterer chose to have the lettering fade to a point where even the most sighted person would have to squint in order to read this dialogue. I have friends that are partially sighted who read comics that would have struggled with this. So I have to address this issue by asking if there might have been another way to sell this fact in the story. Instead of fading the text so much.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Bettie Page (2018) #4

May 13, 2019

A wonderful resolution to what has been a very fun adventure. Bring on the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Bettie Page (2018) #5

May 17, 2019

Given how this issue closes. I'm psyched to get my mits on the second issue of this arc, which is a whole month away. Hopefully, it goes by fairly quickly.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Bettie Page (2018): Halloween Special #1

Oct 3, 2019

A great Halloween issue, which will get you in the mood for some trick or treating.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Bettie Page (2020) #2

Aug 26, 2020

Overall. A pretty good second issue that makes the reader feel pretty much exactly what all the characters are feeling insofar as not being completely in the know about what is going on. I look forward to the third issue in hopes that some clues will be revealed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Bettie Page (2020) #3

Oct 22, 2020

Hopefully, the fourth issue will have a little more action happening and perhaps a little more from Bettie Page herself. Because she has been pretty quiet thus far.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bettie Page (2020) #4

Dec 5, 2020

Overall. The best issue to date, which feels like it is building up towards some big reveal in next month's installment.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Bettie Page (2020) #5

Jan 27, 2021

Overall. The Agatha Christie feel of this story reminded me of countless movies and TV shows have seen over the years. Though I don't think any of them had a heroic Elephant called Tuskems. In a sense, it was the use of the Agatha Christie-style mystery that gave this comic a warm and familiar feeling. Although I had pretty much figured out who the villains were a couple of issues back. But, despite that. I still had fun following along with the story. It's a fun read, but not the best Bettie Page story to come from Dynamite.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Bettie Page (2023) #1

Jun 11, 2023

This isn't a bad story, but I can't help but feel that the character of Beauregard is getting a lot more attention than the titular character who seems to be a lot less streetwise than previous incarnations of her character that have been published by Dynamite. Hopefully, we see Bettie evolve in future issues because right now she doesn't seem to be the same character that I have read in previous books as Beauregard seems to be doing all the investigation.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bettie Page: Alien Agenda #1

Mar 17, 2022

I'm really looking forward to where this story will go in the next chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Bettie Page: The Curse of the Banshee #1

Jun 3, 2021

Stephen Mooney gets this new adventure off to a wonderful start and introduces us to some wonderful new characters. Indeed, the introduction of Maire Dineen whose skepticism makes her quite interesting. Also, I really enjoyed the easy banter between Bettie and Lyssa.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Bettie Page: The Curse of the Banshee #2

Jul 9, 2021

Writer Stephen Mooney picks things up from he left off and manages to remain consistent throughout. I love how he has captured how much of a culture shock it is for Bettie and Lyssa as they learn about the foibles of a small village in Ireland.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Bettie Page: The Curse of the Banshee #3

Aug 17, 2021

Overall. A solid issue. I look forward to seeing what we have coming up in the next one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bettie Page: Unbound #1

Jun 10, 2019

This was a great issue that spins-off wonderfully from the mythology that David Avallone has worked so tirelessly to set up in previous issues. I loved how the issue starts with Bettie recapping absolutely everything that has happened that has led up to her being in this strange new world.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bettie Page: Unbound #2

Jul 8, 2019

Overall. A really strong issue, which allows us to see Bettie as a Vampire for the first and hopefully not the last time.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Bettie Page: Unbound #3

Aug 20, 2019

Overall. A great issue, which leaves us with a cliffhanger that will have fans counting the days for the next issue to come out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Bettie Page: Unbound #4

Sep 25, 2019

OverallDavid Avallone delivers again with this final issue of the current arc of Bettie Page, but he leaves enough at the end of the issue to begin a new story arc, which may involve pirates and crocodiles or any number of things. Either way, you are left with the impression that Bettie still has unfinished business. I look forward to reading what that might be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Bettie Page: Unbound #5

Oct 15, 2019

OverallThis was a great issue. I loved how Bettie and the organization she works for are having to deal with the group of people she brought back with her from the other universe. But it's seeing Bettie meet the great Albert Einstein, which makes up the best part of this issue. I can't wait to see who she will meet in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bettie Page: Unbound #6

Nov 26, 2019

Overall. Bring on issue two. It's got to be more exciting than Christmas.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bettie Page: Unbound #7

Dec 11, 2019

I particularly liked all the backstory that we get in this issue as well. Backstory in which we learn that she was abused as a child and wound up in an abusive relationship before she moved to New York and became a glamour model.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Bettie Page: Unbound #8

Dec 29, 2019

OverallDavid Avallone has managed another solid issue and over the last two and a bit years has sold me on the idea of Bettie Page being a super spy. I'm just waiting for some of these stories to be made into movies of video games.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Bettie Page: Unbound #9

Jan 14, 2020

A strong issue, which is definitely building to a grand finale.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Bettie Page: Unbound #10

Jan 30, 2020

Overall. This gets a huge thumbs up from me. Now if only someone can convince Dynamite to pick up the licensing agreement to do a comic book adaptation of the old 1960s series ‘The Invaders‘. Now that would really be something.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Big Game (2023) #1

Jul 25, 2023

So I'd say this is accessible to you if it has been a while since you have read anything from the Millarverse.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Big Game (2023) #2

Aug 31, 2023

I'm really looking forward to seeing where this goes in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Big Game (2023) #3

Oct 9, 2023

This book, which includes all the heroes and villains that Mark Millar has created continues to weave a fun story. However, seeing so many heroes seen off is starting to make me wonder when we are going to see one of the surviving heroes get a victory. I think they're about due.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Big Game (2023) #4

Oct 27, 2023

OverallMark Millar sets things up for a really big finale issue as we see Morax's forces come through a time portal on the last page. I look forward to seeing how Wesley Gibson and Nemesis fare when up against Morax and his forces. And given that Morax has a Wizard in his employ. It will mean that Cordelia and the Magic Order will no longer be breaking any rules by entering the fray. Bring on issue 5.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Big Game (2023) #5

Nov 20, 2023

Overall. This has been an enjoyable series and I look forward to whatever other crossover events that Millar comes up with.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Black Terror (2019) #1

Oct 9, 2019

Overall. A really solid first issue, which has left me wanting to learn more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Black Terror (2019) #2

Nov 5, 2019

Overall. Nowhere near as strong as the opening issue, but not quite bad enough to put me off coming back for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Black Terror (2019) #3

Dec 14, 2019

Overall this is a promising beginning to what could turn out to be an interesting story arc given that Tim is looking for the magical urn that created the project superheroes team in hopes that it will reunite him with his version of Black Terror. The dialogue is quick and snappy and some of the morally questionable things that Tim gets up to in order get information are rather funny if not also a little dated. I mean giving a weed addict oregano is about as old school as it gets, but it works given that Tim is old school and always will be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Black Terror (2019) #4

Jan 22, 2020

I enjoyed how we got the flashback to Vietnam and how the events that went down there sort of impacted on Black Terror having to do something for Bad Groove by the end of the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Black Terror (2019) #5

Feb 28, 2020

The only redeeming part of the story for me was the Flashback. Now has the book been focused on that story as opposed to the soap opera that we got here. I'd have been a little happier. But it just seemed like the story was kind of disjointed in that the writer was trying to do far too much in just one issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Bloodborne #1

Feb 16, 2018

For a first issue, Bloodborne does a great job of drawing the reader into the world and the combination of writing and art style work really well and conveys the various narrative beats in a quick and concise manner.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Blowback OGN

Jan 18, 2021

Lots of fun and highly recommended for those that enjoy stories that blend history, time travel and pirates, and the Bermuda Triangle together.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
British Paranormal Society: Time Out of Mind #1

May 2, 2022

The StoryWhen Simon Bruttenholm and Honora Grant visit the small country town of Noxton. They are hoping to find answers to their questions. Simon is looking for his mate Lowel who was supposed to be visiting to check out some Standing Stones. While Honora had an interest in the town's May Day Festival, which is supposed to be very different to other village festivals. However, as the two friends begin their investigations they find that the townsfolk are far from helpful. What could the townspeople be hiding?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
British Paranormal Society: Time Out of Mind #2

May 29, 2022

A fantastic second issue that ends with a fun twist that will keep readers thinking until next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
British Paranormal Society: Time Out of Mind #3

Jul 22, 2022

While speaking to a police officer to explain that she thinks a cult may have tried to get hold of Lowell. Honora is dismissed by the policeman, which leads her and Simon into suspecting that he may also be a part of the cult. Having seen their friend's fate. The two of them decide to further investigate and stumble into a ritual that sees the cult about to sacrifice another newcomer to their village to their Gray Man.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Captain Carter (2022) #1

Mar 12, 2022

While getting the bus home. Hydra launches an attack, which pretty much forces Peggy into a position where she is likely to once again represent her country.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Captain Carter (2022) #3

May 31, 2022

Jamie McKelvie continues to deliver the goods in this modern spy thriller. As far as the story goes. This feels like the third season of Agent Carter that we never got. I loved the fact that Peggy's neighbor just happens to be a conspiracy theorist and hacker all in one. Sure it is kind of convenient, but in this instance, it serves the story really well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Captain Carter (2022) #4

Jul 17, 2022

This is a really fun story and am looking forward to reading the final issue next month when it gets released.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Captain Carter (2022) #5

Aug 16, 2022

OverallThe End OF THE LINE! does a brilliant job of bringing this story arc to an end, but leaves things open enough for Agent Carter to return at some future date. As to whether it will be for S.T.R.I.K.E. or some other team of heroes remains to be seen. But I'd personally love to see Harley and Lizzie Braddock get another adventure as well as they made for fun characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Captain Kronos #1

Sep 28, 2017

This first issue lays the groundwork for what I am sure will be a fun story. I can't wait for issue two.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Captain Kronos #2

Oct 25, 2017

Overall. A great second issue with a cliffhanger that will leave you drooling for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Captain Kronos #3

Nov 30, 2017

Overall. A very satisfying issue, which sets me up perfectly for issue four when its released next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Captain Kronos #4

Dec 20, 2017

One aspect that I haven't mentioned in prior reviews is the fact that there is a feature at the close of each issue in which Hammer Films Historian Marcus Hearn the film and how its reputation has grown since its 1974 release. Hopefully, these features will be replicated in the Graphic Novel when it is released in April.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Charlie's Angels vs. The Bionic Woman #1

Jul 2, 2019

Good fun, but to bad that we can't have artwork that resembles the actual characters a little more as opposed to a fast and loose artists interpretation. The artwork is solid. It's just a matter of personal taste. I grew up with these characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Charlie's Angels vs. The Bionic Woman #2

Aug 7, 2019

Overall. The writer does a great job of moving the story forward and ends this issue on a more thoughtful note, which is likely going to build up to some more action in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Charlie's Angels vs. The Bionic Woman #3

Sep 3, 2019

I'm really looking forward to seeing how all of this plays out in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Charlie's Angels vs. The Bionic Woman #4

Oct 2, 2019

Overall. This has been a great homage to both TV shows and I'd personally love to see Cameron Deodio and Soo Lee do a stand-alone Bionic Woman story that makes further use of the TV shows mythology. Maybe something to do with the deadly fembots.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Charlies Angels (2018) #1

Jun 26, 2018

Overall. This is a great first issue with a cliffhanger that will definitelykeep fans guessing to next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Charlies Angels (2018) #3

Aug 7, 2018

Eisma's art once more does a great job of capturing the mood and the 1970's dress sense, which was quite frankly terrible. I mean you could literally hide half of NATO's armory up your trouser legs back in the 70's. Especially when wearing flared pants.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Charlies Angels (2018) #4

Sep 14, 2018

One small complaint though is the lettering on page 17 where the Satanbratan is whispering. I literally had to strain my eyes to read what they were saying. I suggest maybe changing to a different font as opposed to making the text so minutely small that it is barely readable.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Charlies Angels (2018) #5

Oct 30, 2018

OverallThis is a very satisfying conclusion to the story, which bridges the gap between the original ‘Charlies Angels' and some of the other Angels from the original television series, but concludes thing in such a way that leaves it open for a more modern take on Charlies Angels with the original trio working behind the scenes. Which might actually be something that could work.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Chrononauts: Futureshock #1

Oct 29, 2019

Overall. Tons of fun with some laugh out loud moments as well as some genuinely emotional moments.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Compass #1

Jun 20, 2021

Compass! is the sort of pulp story that I can get behind. I love the fact that we have an Arab Muslim as the lead character and look forward to learning more about her and the part of history that she hails from.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Compass #2

Jul 25, 2021

I'm also, enjoying the fact that we haven't seen Margul Khan beyond a partial glimpse of his face through the tent that he occupies. This artistic decision on the part of Greenwood and the comics writers adds to the tension. It also has me wondering if he is a leper like the man that he sent after Shadidah.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Compass #3

Aug 24, 2021

Finally, I also, enjoy the final few pages where we get a little bit of a history lesson about the period of time in which this book is set. This month talks about the Mongols.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Compass #4

Sep 23, 2021

Overall. For me, Compass is easily one of the comic book highlights of 2022 when it comes to giving us a really good story with some strong female leads. I've really enjoyed the writers notes about the various parts of history that the book is referencing. This addition really adds value to the book and I hope that both writers get the opportunity to release a collected edition of this book in trade paperback format.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Compass #5

Oct 21, 2021

A fun book that uses ancient historical artifacts and cultures to tell a compelling and fun story. Please guys write a sequel.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #1

Aug 6, 2023

Jim Zub delivers a story that has an element of mystery to it. As we are left wondering who or what is behind this unstoppable army of soldiers who are single-mindedly taking out entire communities. I look forward to finding out who or what is behind this army in over the course of the next couple of issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #2

Sep 4, 2023

OverallJim Zub continues the story by fleshing out some character development for Brissa as she slowly gets to know and learn to trust our Barbarian anti-hero as they follow the undead army made up of former members of her tribe.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #3

Oct 2, 2023

I can't wait to see where all of this goes in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #4

Oct 28, 2023

Jim Zub's first story arc of Conan with Titan comics comes to a crushing conclusion with Conan and his men doing what must be done. However, we do get a bit of a tease on the last page that suggests that the threat from the vanquished black statue isn't quite over. So it will be interesting to see how this all pans out as the series moves forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #5

Nov 29, 2023

I also loved the dramatic reveal at the close of the issue where we see just what Tarims Touch actually is. Its a brilliantly drawn moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #6

Jan 8, 2024

Jim Zub continues to stay true to the universe and characters that were set up in the 1930s by the late Robert E. Howard. The writer works brilliantly well with the art team and goes all out to portray the real brutality and savagery of the Conan character. Zub's writing also does a decent job of portraying Conan's street smarts when it comes to handling Terims Touch.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #7

Feb 13, 2024

Having picked up from where the last issue immediately left off. This issue takes the story forward and provides plenty of gore and emotionally charged moments along the way. As you'd expect. This all ends with a twist in the tail and is building toward seeing our favorite Barbarian facing perhaps his most famous adversary. This is going to get real in the next issue and I for one can't wait.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #8

Mar 8, 2024

To sum up. This comic is a great example of sequential storytelling where the art team and writer are in perfect sync.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #9

Apr 2, 2024

Overall. A solid chapter in which we get to meet another iconic Robert E. Howard character.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #10

Apr 30, 2024

A great story that is building to what will likely be a fantastic ending.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #11

Jun 4, 2024

Overall a great issue with a shock twist that will keep fans on the edge of their seats ready for the next one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #12

Jul 14, 2024

An excellent conclusion to what has been a brilliant story arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #13

Jul 30, 2024

It's a story very much about the will to survive and how frightening life and death-situations can push a person beyond their limits. Overall, this is a great start and I can't wait to see where the story goes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #14

Aug 31, 2024

Watching from the shadows is a Norse Goddess who is starting to take an interest in the fate of Conan as he charges forth with the Vanir into battle.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #15

Oct 2, 2024

Another fantastic issue with a great mix of strong artwork and fantastic dialogue. I loved how much of a tease Atali becomes in her quest to try and conquer the Barbarian.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #16

Oct 29, 2024

A nicely done story that looks at what kind of things can make the strongest of us question our faith as well as our own minds. I enjoyed the flashback sequences and hope we get more of that kind of thing in future issues I feel that Conan's childhood years are something that would be interesting to explore in future issues. Especially if it is juxtaposed with a present-day dilemma. Added to all of that. I'd also love to see more of Atali and other strong female sorcerers in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Conan The Barbarian (2023) #17

Dec 8, 2024

Jim Zub kicks off this new story arc, promising exciting adventures with Conan and his Pirate Queen, a character we've only seen in flashbacks until now. It will be intriguing to see how this story unfolds as it develops. This is a strong and engaging start.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Conan: Serpent War #1

Dec 4, 2019

Jim Zub has put out a solid opening issue here. My only gripe being is that with it being such a large cast of characters. We didn't really get to see too much of Conan until the end, but I think Zub will probably address that in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Conan: Serpent War #2

Dec 23, 2019

The issue closes out with a great twist of the tale, which will most likely keep readers guessing until January 2020 when issue three hits comic racks.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Conan: Serpent War #3

Jan 13, 2020

Jim Zub's story sets the stage for what will no doubt be an epic ending as we see Moon Knight put on of the two bracelets on and find himself transported into the battle, which Conan and Agnes are already fighting. Quite how Kane will fall into all of this will no doubt become clear in next month's final issue and I can't wait to find out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Conan: Serpent War #4

Jan 26, 2020

This has been a pretty good mini-series that has entertained.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Crackdown (2019) #1

Feb 18, 2019

Not bad, but there isn't really anything here as yet to keep me interested beyond the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Creed: The Next Round (2023) #1

Jul 3, 2023

A great read and who is to say that a movie series about Amara Creed could not be a thing in the future? I certainly would not bet against it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Cross To Bear #1

Oct 30, 2021

Overall Cross To Beargets off to a pretty solid start as we get a solid idea of the type of character that Simon is. Hopefully, we'll get more on his older brother Edgar in future issues as I found him to be a rather compelling character. I also liked how it is hinted that The Ripper might well have been a member of the Order.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Cross To Bear #2

Dec 6, 2021

Overall. A real strong second issue, which ends with The Order riding off to chase down The Ripper.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Cross To Bear #3

Jan 4, 2022

OverallThis latest issue of Cross To Bear does a great job of exploring the backstory of Simon and Edgar and also allows them to resolve some of their personal issues. I really enjoyed how Edgar talks about how tough and honest life in the west, is so much easier for him. Then his old life when I was forever having to watch his back as the leader of the order. I also enjoyed the idea of the hunters being hunted by the person that they are hunting.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Cross To Bear #4

Feb 28, 2022

Writer Marko Stojanovi delivers a fantastic twist in this issue, which you don't see coming. And part of the reason for that is the build-up. The issue starts with Edgar mending some fences with Baltimore who he and his late wife adopted. We then go on the hunt for the Ripper, which slowly leads up to the twist about the Ripper not being the same person that killed Edgar's wife. But it's the extra layer to that twist that will blow you away.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Dan Dare #1

Oct 12, 2017

Overall this is a pretty solid first issue and I'm invested enough to want to check out issue 2. Hopefully, we'll see a bit more action in the second issue too.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Dan Dare #2

Nov 15, 2017

Overall. This is a solid second issue that moves the story along quite nicely. Obviously having had very little exposure to Dan Dare other than via the Big Finish Audio series. I'm no expert, but that's the beauty of what Titan is doing. It's a continuation but done in a way in which it is accessible to newer readers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Dan Dare #4

Dec 29, 2017

Overall. This was a great way to end the first story arc of Titan's new Dan Dare comics. I very much look forward to seeing how the next arc develops given that things are very much open for a shedload of new adventures.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Daredevil (2023) #1

Sep 19, 2023

A great first issue that felt good as a jumping-on point for me.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Daredevil (2023) #2

Oct 23, 2023

All that said. I'm enjoying this series and looking forward to seeing what happens in the next issue with the foes that Matt is about to face are both human and supernatural.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Daredevil (2023) #3

Nov 21, 2023

The best though is saved for last as the artist pulls off some brilliant panels that create a tense and dramatic build-up to the reveal of the big villain of the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Daredevil (2023) #4

Dec 13, 2023

OverallI continue to look forward to this comic each month. I enjoy how Matt Murdoch is narrating what is happening and also like how he is looking to justify his actions when he is in the Daredevil Costume. Of course, he would not be able to treat crooks in the same way as Daredevil does if he were a copper as there are rules.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Daredevil (2023) #5

Jan 24, 2024

Saladin Ahmed continues to spin an interesting story in which we see Father Matt adjusting to his new life while trying to stay true to his spirituality and the rules that he must live by. One of the most interesting aspects of Daredevil's character has always been the conflict of interest between his secret identity and his religious and spiritual beliefs. So it is great to see this aspect get explored more.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Daredevil (2023) #6

Mar 12, 2024

Over the entire run of this series. I've really enjoyed the clever use of the seven deadly sins and how their demons have been portrayed when they have possessed Murdock's friends. I can't wait to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Daredevil (2023) #7

Apr 3, 2024

A fantastic issue in which Daredevil gets a hot tip from a former gang member and reconnects with an old flame.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Daredevil (2023) #8

Apr 29, 2024

All the writers and artists on this book do a great job. I found the first two stories to be the most in line with the books current storylines and truly enjoyed those. But even the stories that stepped out of that mold were a lot of fun. I really enjoyed the final story, which was about Electra rescuing an old mans dog from some thugs. The old man thanks Electra and makes a really important point about the value of connection and family.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Daredevil (2023) #9

May 13, 2024

Saladin Ahmed continues to spin a pretty good story and the dialogue between Matt and Foggy when they have the meeting toward the end of the book is fantastic. It's helped by some great artwork specifically regarding Foggy's micro-expressions once he has heard Matt's story and is trying to process everything. The book ends on a fantastic cliffhanger in which Father Math will likely have a bit of explaining to do to one of the kids he looks after.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Daredevil (2023) #10

Jul 2, 2024

The Wages of Sin Equal Death is a strong issue that pays off on many of the plot threads we have seen over the past 9 issues. I loved the confrontation at the start where Jason calls Matt out for lying about his secret identity. It will be interesting to learn what happened to Jason's father when Matt eventually catches up with him. If indeed he is in any shape to do so. The confrontation between Daredevil and Fisk is nicely done and as you'd expect. We get some great dialogue between the two as they duke it out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Daredevil (2023) #11

Jul 15, 2024

Saladin Ahmed continues to weave a fun story as he brings back Daredevils two most deadly of enemies and ramps up their strength to beyond superhuman capacity thanks to the evil demon that followed Matt out of hell when he was placed back on earth. I also love the plot twist concerning Jason and how that gets used by Fisk during their fight. I look forward to seeing how everything plays out in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Daredevil (2023) #12

Aug 14, 2024

Overall. This was an enjoyable issue and I can't wait to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Daredevil (2023) #13

Sep 10, 2024

OverallAnother strong issue that continues to illustrate Matt Murdock's struggle to keep both of his lives as a kindly priest and avenging Daredevil in check. I enjoyed seeing the conflict that Matt struggles with when he refuses to help Fisk find the absolution that he is looking for. The final panel is pretty much telegraphed from the start of the book, but the journey toward it is well-written and truly earned.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Daredevil (2023) #14

Oct 7, 2024

OverallOverall this is a solid chapter where various revelations have unveiled Matt Murdock's inner conflict between being a man of god and an avenging angel. Its a perfect set up for what I think could well be a battle royale when Daredevil eventually confronts the Devil that has taken Jason and left a few corpses in its wake. I look forward to seeing how it all plays out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Daredevil (2023) #15

Nov 26, 2024

Overall, this is a solid issue and one of the few comics I genuinely look forward to reading each month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Daredevil (2023) #16

Dec 20, 2024

This was a solid issue that throws Daredevil into a series of challenges sure to keep him occupied for the next few installments. The conflict between Matt Murdock and Foggy Nelson promises to deliver some compelling drama. It's already clear that a demon has taken hold of Foggy, exploiting both their friendship and Foggy's intimate knowledge of Matt to its fullest advantage. I'm especially looking forward to the inevitable courtroom showdown between Murdock and his oldest friendthere's nothing quite like a well-executed legal drama, whether in comics or on screen.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Dark Knights of Steel (2021) #1

Nov 6, 2021

Dark Knights of Steel opens up a world of possible storylines and gives alternative takes on many of DC's most popular characters. I can't wait to read more.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Dark Knights of Steel (2021) #2

Dec 7, 2021

Also, seeing Amanda Waller as one of the El Knights who is vying for war was great. Bring on issue 3.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Dark Knights of Steel (2021) #3

Jan 8, 2022

Overall. A solid third issue, which adds a few more interesting layers to the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Dark Knights of Steel (2021) #4

Feb 7, 2022

Added to that is some really strong artwork from the art team, who I'd say do a fair bit of the heavy lifting in terms of showing and not telling. The panels of a Dying Martha Wayne asking the Els to take over the Kingdom were brilliantly drawn. As was Luthors transformation and introduction as a key villain. The final page where we see The Dark Knight and Alfred ride out is really cool. I can't wait for more Dark Knights of Steel.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Dark Knights of Steel (2021) #5

Mar 7, 2022

However, Taylor saves the best for last. As he introduces the Kents into the storyline. But with a rather fun twist.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Dark Knights of Steel (2021) #7

Jun 19, 2022

I'm really looking forward to seeing how all of this pans out in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
DC's 'Twas the 'Mite Before Christmas (2023) #1

Dec 18, 2023

This is very much a fun book with some fantastic and fun Holiday Stories that fans will enjoy. So we'd like to thank for the following writers and artists for their parts in creating this fun package.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Dead Seas (2022) #1

Dec 27, 2022

OverallA really strong first issue that does a fantastic job of setting up the world in which Ghosts have become as common a problem to society as rats. I look forward to seeing where this goes in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Dead Seas (2022) #2

Jan 29, 2023

A solid second issue that does a nice job of building on what was set up in the opening issue. I loved the character of Miss Barrimore being somewhat of a fly in the ointment toward the people that run the prison ship. It's especially fun given that she is the daughter of the gazillionaire who owns the fleet of prison ships that are mining ectoplasm.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Dead Seas (2022) #3

Mar 4, 2023

I'm loving the all-out action of this book and can't wait for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Dead Seas (2022) #6

May 30, 2023

The StoryContinuing from the last issue. Miss Barrimore has just learned that the leader of the Ghosts that have taken over The Perdition is her late mother. As the ghost continues to terrorize the ship. The mother of ghosts tells Miss Barrimore about how her father trapped her and all the other ghosts on Earth in order to harvest their ectoplasm. Now the ghosts want to get off the ship and Barrimore' s late mother wants her revenge and plans to send the head of Barrico Industries to hell. Thankfully, Gus has a plan that will save the few survivors on the ship, but it requires a huge sacrifice.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Deep Cuts (2023) #1

May 2, 2023

This first issue of Deep Cuts is a brilliant love letter to the early Jazz era of New Orleans as it shows us the path walked by a great many musicians of that time and some of the pitfalls that they faced.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Deep Cuts (2023) #2

Jun 7, 2023

Ray proceeds to take Gail to a Jazz club and offers her a crash course about Jazz, but by the close of the night, she is only beginning to get it. The following night she meets up with Jazz composer and pianist Leo Jones who teaches her the fundamentals of Jazz Chord progressions and how they work. At this point Gail begins to gain a better understanding and sets about writing her song.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Deep Cuts (2023) #3

Aug 24, 2023

Like the two prior issues of Deep Cuts. This issue tells a unique and fun story of a musician and their love of music. Only this time out. The principal character has a tough life decision to make, which is ultimately made for him.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Deep Cuts (2023) #4

Jan 16, 2024

I'm loving this Deep Cuts series and very much look forward to reading the next issue to learn about another musician's journey.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Deep Cuts (2023) #5

Mar 10, 2024

This is a great story, which is a departure from previous issues of Deep Cuts where the book has focused mainly on musicians. This story breaks that wall down and instead looks at a cynical music journalist who has lost touch with music and has generally been lazily writing about the established music of the day as opposed to exploring what is going on at the roots of the music scene.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Deep Cuts (2023) #6

Apr 9, 2024

Overall as somewhat of an armchair musician. I've really enjoyed reading these Deep Cuts stories and am kind of sad that the series has to end. Hopefully, something similar to this will come along in the years to come. As its been a fun blend of fiction with a bit of musical history thrown in.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Defenders (2017) #1

Jun 15, 2017

In fact I have been having fun reading the individual comics for Luke Cage and Iron Fist and will likely have my review of issue 4 of Iron Fist go live in the next couple of days.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Defenders (2017) #2

Jul 12, 2017

I look forward to seeing how all this will play out in the third issue when it is released next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Defenders (2017) #3

Jul 21, 2017

Overall this was a fantastic third issue with some brilliant character beats and some wonderfully drawn art work byDavid Marquez

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Defenders (2017) #4

Aug 10, 2017

The art work by David Marquez is a veritable feast for the eyes. I loved the sense of motion he brought to the fight between our two heres and Diamond Back.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Defenders (2017) #5

Sep 14, 2017

With Frank Castle injured and in the wind and Diamondback planning his next move. I look forward to seeing where all this will lead in issue 7 when it released next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Defenders (2017) #6

Oct 26, 2017

David Marquez does some great art on this issue. I'm continuing to love how he lays out the action beats in this comic. There's a very street level viciousnessto how he draws the fights.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Detective Comics (2016) #1090

Nov 5, 2024

The art is pretty solid throughout the book and the artist and colorist make clever use of shadow and light and create an authentic atmosphere.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Detective Comics (2016) #1091

Dec 1, 2024

Overall, this is a fantastic issue, and I'm looking forward to seeing what unfolds in the third issue, expected around Christmas.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Doc Savage: Ring Of Fire #1

Mar 21, 2017

This first issue of Doc Savage: Ring of Fire goes on Sale in comics stores on the 29 March. If your a fan of the character. It is a must have.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Doc Savage: Ring Of Fire #3

May 16, 2017

One of the things that has been consistent throughout this book have been the various vehicles and weapons used. They are very true to the period and really help the story feel like a convincing pulp adventure. As ever. We are left with a really cool cliffhanger, which will keep us guessing until next months final issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Doc Savage: Ring Of Fire #4

Jun 28, 2017

I hope Dynamite do a bit of arm twisting and get Avallone and Acosta to work on another Doc Savage title. If they do. I'm definitely in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Doctor Radar #1

Nov 21, 2017

If you appreciate pulp storytelling and enjoy old school detectives. Then you'll likely really get a kick out of Doctor Radar. Hopefully, the second issue will give us a little bit more from the villain's point of view.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Doctor Who Comic (2020) #3

Jan 17, 2021

Overall. A really enjoyable issue, which looks like it's setting things up for a brilliant finale. I just have to wonder how Houser will write Thomas Eddison and Nikola Tesla when The Doctor's finally catch up with them. It will be interesting for sure given the history that both these great inventors share.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Doctor Who Comic (2020) #4

Feb 15, 2021

Rose Tyler gets used to great effect in this final issue. I also loved the banter between Edison and Tesla when they both agreed that the world is not ready to hear about a time-traveling police box, which just happens to be bigger on the inside.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Doctor Who: Doom's Day (2023) #1

Jul 9, 2023

Once again Jody Houser delivers a fun story, which I am sure is going to have lots of plot twists as it all develops. This opening issue does not include the Doctor. But it would seem that The 12th Doctor is likely to turn up at some stage in this story. However, for now, the main story focuses on Doom and her remaining 24 hours as she tries to find the Doctor. And not The Doctor Who that Missy is pretending to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Doctor Who: Doom's Day (2023) #2

Aug 2, 2023

Overall. The story doesn't really conclude, but sometimes a story left open can make for a better story or even stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Doctor Who: Empire Of The Wolf #1

Nov 22, 2021

Empire of the Wolf is looking to have some awesome fun with time travel and alternate universes and I can't wait for the next issue to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Doctor Who: Empire Of The Wolf #2

Dec 19, 2021

Jody Houser does a solid job of writing the dialogue and pretty much nails the personalities of these two Doctors, who are from very different eras of the series. I particularly liked how the 11th Doctor and 8 start bickering from the moment that they meet. And I also appreciated how Rose had to separate them like a mother separating two little boys. Overall. A fun story with a little bit of a mystery for our two Doctors to solve. I'm looking forward to February for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Doctor Who: Empire Of The Wolf #3

Jan 14, 2022

Jody Houser continues to impress with her knowledge of pop culture television. I loved the part of this issue when Rose Tyler talks herself up to the 8th Doctor in order to try and get into the mindset of the Empress. I loved how she referenced her first year of adventures with the 9th Doctor and referenced herself as The Bad Wolf who looked into the eye of the time vortex.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Doctor Who: Empire Of The Wolf #4

Feb 13, 2022

Jody Houser does a great job of wrapping this story up. I really enjoyed how she nailed the back and forth between the two doctors as they both come up with their plan at the same time by completing each other's sentences. It's obvious that Houser knows her Doctor Who and is well versed in both the modern and classic incarnations, which really shines through.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Doctor Who: Missy #1

Apr 17, 2021

This is a really solid start. The banter between the two villains is great and it was nice to see The Third Doctor in comics again. It's going to be fun and interesting to see what will happen when the Third and Twelfth Doctor's eventually meet. Indeed, what will the Third Doctor make of Missy?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Doctor Who: Missy #2

May 16, 2021

This is a fun issue that expands on the story just enough to keep you on the edge of your seat. I loved the references to the Corsair toward the close of the issue. Which has me hoping that she will turn up at some stage. As for the real Doctor. We still have no clue as to what fate has befallen him. But I'm sure it will not be permanent.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Doctor Who: Missy #3

Jun 18, 2021

Jody Houser continues to write some stonkingly brilliant Doctor Who and she really should be offered a writing gig on the actual show.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Doctor Who: Missy #4

Jul 31, 2021

As with previous issues. Jody Houser continues to capture the voices of the various characters brilliantly.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Doctor Who: Once Upon a Timelord (2023) OGN

Nov 11, 2023

This is a fun book that both classic and modern Doctor Who fans will enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Doctor Who: Origins #1

Jun 14, 2022

This is a promising start to what looks set to be a fun adventure.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Doctor Who: Origins #2

Jul 11, 2022

This second issue does a great job of continuing the story and watching Taslo's character slowly evolve from a by-the-book time agent to someone that is worthy of being the Doctor's companion is fun to watch. In a way Taslo's act first and question later reminds me a bit of the 4th Doctor's companion, Leela.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Doctor Who: Origins #3

Aug 8, 2022

OverallJody Houser once again delivers a cracking mystery for our hero to solve. I particularly enjoyed the reveal that Taslo was working for the Gallifrey Council Member that issued them with their orders. The dialogue between the characters is sharp and crisp and things have been set up brilliantly for the next issue. The question being. Who will Taslo ultimately align with as we get closer to the final issue?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Doctor Who: Origins #4

Sep 13, 2022

This issue of Origins closes out the first story arc featuring The Fugitive Doctor, but also opens things up for the beginnings of The Doctor's time on the run. The scientist who was behind finding The Doctor has sanctioned Gallifreyan security services to go after her.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Doctor Who: The Fifteenth Doctor #1

Jul 7, 2024

Overall, this is promising start to a story that really explores The Doctor and Ruby's friendship.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Doctor Who: The Fifteenth Doctor #2

Aug 17, 2024

Overall. A fantastic issue that seems to be setting up something rather sinister. I can't wait for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Doctor Who: The Fifteenth Doctor #4

Nov 25, 2024

Overall, a satisfying conclusion to what has been a truly enjoyable story. I'm excited to see what adventures lie ahead!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Doctor Who: The Road to the Thirteenth Doctor: Tenth Doctor #1

Jul 4, 2018

This is a wonderful little story, which will have you wondering what the writer and artist will do with the Eleventh and Twelve incarnations of Doctor Who. We also get a little glimpse of some of the artwork we will see in the Thirteenth Doctor Adventures when they start.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Doctor Who: The Road to the Thirteenth Doctor: The Eleventh Doctor #2

Aug 13, 2018

I really enjoyed this issue. The stories were not the best, but certainly weren't the worst you'd read either. Afterall you can only do so much for a one-shot, and this pretty much shows off what can be done, but you really do find yourself wanting more.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Doctor Who: The Seventh Doctor #1

Jun 4, 2018

Overall. I really enjoyed this first issue. It feels very much like Cartmel and Aaronovitch have never really stopped writing the seventh Doctor and Ace because of the dialogue and friendlybanter that was Ace and The Doctor is very much there.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Doctor Who: The Third Doctor #1

Sep 12, 2016

Paul Cornell does some outstanding work in that he finds the character voices with great ease.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Doctor Who: The Third Doctor #2

Oct 19, 2016

If your a fan of the television adventures of the Third Doctor. Then you can't really go wrong with this comic book iteration. Paul Cornell's love of Doctor Who and snappy dialogue really shines through in this series. So much so that I can't wait to read the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Doctor Who: The Third Doctor #3

Nov 28, 2016

This book continues to be an event for me in the truest sense of the word. I hope that Titan will give the nod to do more Third Doctor stories and maybe some Second Doctor ones too.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Doctor Who: The Third Doctor #5

Feb 25, 2017

While it is sad that Paul Cornell is making this is final ‘Doctor Who' story. It is a great story to end on.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor #0

Sep 20, 2018

This is a really good collection of stories and a great way to introduce comic readers to the 13th Doctor and Doctor Who in general.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor #1

Nov 5, 2018

Doctor Who: The 13th Doctor #1 will be out in all good comics stores on Wednesday 7 November.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor: Season Two #1

Jan 6, 2020

Overall. I really enjoyed this first issue of 2020, which is basically issue one of volume two of 13s comic book adventures. Houser continues to write the 13th Doctor better than she is written in the television series, but for how long remains to be seen. Given that the new series recently started and seemed to have shown a little improvement over last year's poor showing.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor: Holiday Special #1

Nov 11, 2019

Writer Jody Houser has managed to offer up an intriguing Christmas mystery here and leaves us with a fantastic cliffhanger and a few questions. One of which being, 'is Santa really a bad guy?'

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor: Season Two #2

Feb 5, 2020

A fairly good issue that moves the story forward a little and comes up with a wicked way to introduce the Autons while simultaneously providing a scary final page that involves the weeping angels. Whatever you do. Don't ever blink.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor #2

Dec 4, 2018

Overall. I'm in it for one more issue, but I hope the story moves a bit quicker in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor: Holiday Special #2

Dec 10, 2019

This second book of the story arc scores really high on the Holiday fun factor despite the fact that it was sort of a predictable story, but with the solid artwork and the feel-good factor. You'd have to be a total Grinch not to go along with it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor: Season Two #4

Jun 3, 2020

The final page leaves us with a cracking cliffhanger as we return to London, which has been completely decimated. We do get a hint that it may not be our version of London because there is a wanted poster for what looks a little bit like Rose Tyler, which could suggest that it is the parallel version of London.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor #4

Feb 4, 2019

All that said. The art was solid and the story is not so bad that I don't want to see more from writer Jody Houser because there was potential here for a bigger and more sinister arc that could have tested and stretch the characters out. Hopefully, we get to see that happen in future arcs.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor #5

Mar 4, 2019

A really strong start, which ends on a cliffhanger that will perhaps just about keep fans hanging on for more to come in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor #6

Apr 8, 2019

OverallWriter Jody Houser has managed to deliver a fun little mystery here, which makes better use of the characters and storytelling potential than the actual television series manages to do.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor #7

May 1, 2019

Overall. A really strong issue with a lot to like. But what does the podcast have to do with it all? I suspect we'll find out what it all means in the next issue. And I can't wait.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor #8

May 27, 2019

Houser gives us a story, which could only be done on Doctor Who and this is one that I think Chris Chibnall should look at commissioning for the TV series. Given that it is better than a majority of what he put out in his first season as the Doctor Who showrunner.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Doctor Who: The Thirteenth Doctor #12

Sep 13, 2019

Overall. I have really enjoyed this comic and this story arc. I'd love to see the Corsair again in future issues. Why the BBC haven't used her in the TV series is beyond me.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Dungeons & Dragons: Saturday Morning Adventures (2024) #1

Jan 27, 2024

Overall a great first issue that has brought back some fond memories of the animated series that I loved to watch back in the 1980s.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Dungeons & Dragons: Saturday Morning Adventures (2024) #2

Mar 2, 2024

This is another enjoyable issue, which sees the group go out to see in search of Bobby and some pirate booty.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Dungeons & Dragons: Saturday Morning Adventures (2024) #4

May 12, 2024

I enjoyed this book and hope that we get to see further adventures in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Earthdivers #1

Oct 9, 2022

Stephen Graham Jones gets off to a great start with Earthdivers. I really enjoyed the fact that Tad was having to do things that he'd not dream of doing in order to fit in. The killing of the sailor at the start is pretty much the first instance of Tad having to go against his true nature so he can move forward with his mission. I'm looking forward to the next issue to see where this goes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Earthdivers #2

Nov 6, 2022

Am loving the conversations between Sosh and Yellow Kid that speculate about what might happen if they change things for the worse. Would they go back again and try and change that?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Earthdivers #3

Dec 14, 2022

This was a really strong issue that took time to tell a smaller story within the larger story. I really enjoyed the interplay between Emily and this mysterious Native American Elder who just pretty much shows up out of nowhere. I also enjoyed how the elder was kind of noncommital when answering Emily's question about whether or not Tad had succeeded.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Earthdivers #4

Jan 24, 2023

As far as story progression goes. This issue is a tad slow as it deals a lot with Tad being a prisoner and getting severely beaten by Columbus's men. But not severely enough for him to be not any use. The segments set in 2112 take an interesting turn when Emily sees the time-travel device as an opportunity to completely reset time.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Earthdivers #5

Mar 3, 2023

OverallA solid issue which continues to push the story forward. However it is beginning to get a little confusing with the amount of time travel elements as extra layers get added to the story, which may have some. Particularly me having to check back and re – read the previous issues to keep up. As I have lost the plot a little with the events of 2112. Hopefully things become clearer when we see events unfold in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Earthdivers #6

Apr 1, 2023

This first story arc of Earthdivers comes to a thrilling end and we quickly learn about how Tad's actions in 1492 impacted the lives of Sosh, Emily and Yellow Kid. So it will be interesting to see what they decide to do next when they engage in a mission that will take place in 1776.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Earthdivers #7

May 23, 2023

A great first issue with what feels like a simpler story than the one that has been told in previous issues. But that's only because it is focused mainly on Tawny and not a bunch of people across more than one timeline.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Earthdivers #8

Jul 19, 2023

This really personal story about Tawny trying to find her kids is proving to be quite a bit of fun. I love her plan to infect the Solutrean people with whatever cold virus she has gotten. As that very much mirrors, what happened to America's Native peoples when the European Settlers came. I also love the fact that Tawny is conscious of the effects that her actions may be having on the future of America.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Earthdivers #9

Sep 11, 2023

This was a satisfying conclusion to the story, which leaves Tawny in a place where some other writer can come in and pick her story up for the future. Whatever that will hold.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Elvira In Horrorland #1

May 28, 2022

A really funny book. I can't wait to see how Elvira handles a Kubric movie in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Elvira In Horrorland #2

Jun 26, 2022

This was a really fun issue that managed to reference a great many of Kubrick's movies including 2001 A Space Odyssey, Eyes Wide Shut, A Clockwork Orange, and more. But most of the jokes and humor come from how many of Jack Nicholson's movies get referenced throughout the book. I particularly enjoyed how Avallone made use of the classic "You Need Me on that Wall speech from 'A Few Good Men', which is perhaps one of my favorite movies to come out of the 1990s.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Elvira In Horrorland #3

Aug 12, 2022

Another fun moment is when Elvira reassures the ship's cat that the Alien will not eat him as it's not Alf. At which point a rarely used thought bubble comes up from the cat referring to the alien Alf being a threat to the feline spieces or words to that effect. You really need to read the book to get the joke. As well as watch the 80s sitcom Alf, who was a cute and funny alien that was always threatening to eat the family cat.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Elvira In Horrorland #4

Sep 25, 2022

The sequence of panels where Teddy and Elvira rush for the TV remote was also well drawn and quite fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira In Horrorland #5

Dec 20, 2022

Overall this is a perfect conclusion to 2022. Bring on Elvira in Monsterland in 2023. What next King Kong and Faye Ray? I guess we'll have to wait and see.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Elvira in Monsterland (2023) #1

May 21, 2023

Overall this is lots of fun and I can't wait to see where it goes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Elvira in Monsterland (2023) #2

Jul 4, 2023

This second issue of Elvira in Monsterland delivers the laughs and whacky plot twists that we have all come to love and know from David Avallone. I really enjoyed some of the meta moments where we saw the movie characters break characters to talk with Elvira. The fun of those kinds of moments never gets old. I mean Karloff in full monster makeup enjoying a cup of Earl Grey Tea just feels so right.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Elvira in Monsterland (2023) #3

Jul 29, 2023

This was a fun issue that did a respectable job of moving the story forward and given that the next issue will include some Kaiju. I can't wait to see what Elvira makes of those movies and what further banter she will get to have with Vlad.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira in Monsterland (2023) #4

Sep 9, 2023

I can't wait to see what this writer cooks up next. Will the Kaiju start their conquest of Earth in Tokyo or will they launch their attack in Avallone's backyard? I look forward to finding out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira in Monsterland (2023) #5

Oct 3, 2023

David Avallone delivers a knockout punch of fun with an issue that goes a little meta with Elvira telling him how to write the story by insisting that there should be no flashbacks. Add to that the two parody versions of Marvel and DC's iconic Superhero teams and you are in for one hell of a fun finale.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira Meets Vincent Price #1

Aug 5, 2021

Storywise. This gets off to a brilliant start. The in-jokes are thick and fast and the initial meeting with Elvira and her horror hero was well executed. I can't wait to read the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira Meets Vincent Price #2

Sep 14, 2021

OverallAnkhs For The Mammariesis a solid second issue that continues the story and keeps your interest. I loved the flashback sequence and how that builds to Elvira's meeting with Claudia. I can't wait to see how this all will pan out in the next issue. Which is going to involve more traveling for this duo.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Elvira Meets Vincent Price #3

Nov 17, 2021

Another solid issue with lots of cheeky jokes and fun innuendo and a brilliant cliffhanger that will have you on the edge of your seat.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Elvira Meets Vincent Price #4

Jan 6, 2022

Once again David Avallone proves to be a master of pulp storytelling as well as the double entendre. He captures Elvira's personality brilliantly and pretty much every interaction that she has is brilliantly written. I also really enjoyed how well-written the banter was between Elvira and Vincent Price and would love to see this pairing return for more adventures.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #1

Jul 3, 2018

This is a great first issue, which sets the premise up well and ends on a cliffhanger that will have fans eating their shorts for an entire month. Dave Avallone as always brings some fantastic dialogue to his take on Elvira who is every bit as witty as his take on Battie Page.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #2

Sep 12, 2018

I'm really looking forward to seeing what Avallone and Acosta come up with for the next issue. Hopefully Elvira will meet someone that actually knows a thing or two about how to fight vampires.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #3

Dec 3, 2018

I look forward to the next issue, which is very likely to drop later this month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #4

Jan 14, 2019

I look forward to next months issue to find out how Elvira will manage to get home.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #5

May 7, 2019

Overall. A wonderful issue. Hopefully, the wait will not seem as long for issue 6.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #6

Jun 13, 2019

The story has had some nice twist and turns and has given artist Dave Acosta and lot of room to play around with a lot of different visual ideas. I loved the shopping mall, which makes so much sense given that shopping malls are many peoples idea of a personal hell.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #7

Jul 17, 2019

The team of Avallone and Acosta have hit another winner with this comic and I really look forward to seeing how it concludes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #8

Aug 13, 2019

Overall. A fun read and definitely worth getting when it comes out as a graphic novel.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #9

Sep 16, 2019

Overall. A really strong start. I can't wait for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #10

Nov 12, 2019

OverallDave Avallone continues to amuse with his characterisation of Elvira and the fairly consistent breaking of the third wall as she addresses readers directly. I can't wait to see how the writer will end this story arc. Especially in light of many of the recent issues he has already done.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #11

Jan 7, 2020

OverallThe issue ends as we learn which demon that the coven has gone and summoned, which will no doubt keep the most ardent readers of this book on the edge of their seats for a whole month. But I am sure it will be well worth the wait.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #12

Feb 22, 2020

OverallThis is a wonderful conclusion to what has been a fantastic 12 issues of fun and frolics with Elvira and her incredible gift for puns. We get several moments in this issue where Elvira breaks the third wall and talks directly to us about what Dave Avallone has in store, but the most fun is had in the closing few panels where both writer and artist make a brief cameo. Overall a fun way to close out what has been a surprisingly long and fun run.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark: Spring Special #1

May 21, 2019

Overall. An Enjoyable read and great if you want to celebrate Halloween in the Spring.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Elvira: The Shape of Elvira #1

Jan 29, 2019

OverallThis is a promising start for what hopefully will be a great Elvira adventure with plenty of laughs and puns along the way. David Avallone has a great track record when it comes to writing for characters like Elvira and his last series with Elvira has set the bar high. Hopefully, this new one will be every bit as enthralling.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Elvira: The Shape of Elvira #2

Apr 24, 2019

I look forward to the third issue, which will hit next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira: The Shape of Elvira #3

Jun 5, 2019

I loved a lot of the fish puns at the start of the book where Elvira is talking to the two Government Agents from The U.S. Department for Fish and Wildlife. I also loved the dialogue exchanged between Elvira and Gil and have to give Letterer Taylor Esposito credit for some nice work for his part in creating Gil's unique voice.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Elvira: The Shape of Elvira #4

Dec 5, 2019

This has been a fun series to follow. It is apparent that David Avallone's imagination knows no bounds when it comes to writing leading ladies in comics, which is something that has been apparent since he released his Betty Page comics. His take on Elvira has been as good as Betty. So much so that I think it would be fun to see a crossover between the two ladies in a future series. You could probably do Elvira, Betty Page, and Vampirella in the one series. Of course, Dynamite would have to give the go-ahead on that, but hell. I'd read it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Excalibur (2019) #1

Nov 17, 2019

All that said. Given how this issue ended. I am definitely on board to follow the story arc through because I really want to see how Betsy Braddock handles her new role as England's protector.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Excalibur (2019) #2

Nov 23, 2019

OverallThus far Tini Howard has done a fairly good job of moving this story forward. We get a look at some Scottish folklore here when it comes to the Selkie and it was fun to see some Druids brought into the story. We also learn that it is a rival tribe to these druids that have been helping Morgana, which could make for some interesting events in issue 3 given that Apocalypse and unconscious Rogue are the only defence for the Lighthouse given that Captain Britain has gone off to the otherworld.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Excalibur (2019) #3

Dec 8, 2019

OverallTim Howard's story moves forward at a nice pace and it will be interesting to learn if Betsy and the team will be able to save Brian and Rogue from their respective fates. I'm looking forward to seeing how Pete Wisdom and MI-13's involvement will help or hinder them in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Excalibur (2019) #4

Dec 22, 2019

There was some really cool stuff in this issue. Writer Tim Howard seems to be setting up a huge challenge for Betsy Braddock to take on in the next issue where she will have to find a way to return all the mythical monsters back to their own realm and keep Britain safe, but how will she manage to do that with Akaba being against her as well as Morgan Le Fey? I guess we are going to have to wait and see, but it does look like Apocalypse may have a bigger role to play as the story moves forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Excalibur (2019) #5

Jan 12, 2020

Overall. This was a pretty enjoyable issue. Although I will admit to having had a little trouble following at times due to the fact that my head is still a little foggy with a cold and so forth.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Excalibur (2019) #6

Jan 25, 2020

Overall. A fun read and a book that I will continue to follow.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Excalibur (2019) #7

Feb 20, 2020

There's enough here for me to invest in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Excalibur (2019) #8

Mar 12, 2020

This issue seems to wrap up the hunting part of the story arc, but I get the feeling there's more to come and look forwards to finding out whether or not Cullen Bloodstone will seek revenge on Betsy and her team. Especially given that he was in contact with eth Akkabba Coven. It will be interesting to see how this all plays out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Excalibur (2019) #9

Mar 25, 2020

I'm also beginning to wonder why we have a few X-Men trusting the judgment of Apocalypse in all of this and hope we get some answers to that soon as well. Especially given my limited knowledge of their history.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Excalibur (2019) #10

Jun 14, 2020

Overall. A solid issue that begins to stitch together various plot points from earlier issues. I look forward to seeing how things progress next month. Especially given how things ended in this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Excalibur (2019) #11

Aug 25, 2020

I look forward to seeing how all of this will play out in the next issue and finding out how Betsy's chat with Saturnyne will turn out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Excalibur (2019) #12

Sep 22, 2020

I loved the sequence where Saturnyne was explaining to Betsy how much Brian Braddock was an ally to her and her people and seeing all the other Captain Britains was also a bit of a thrill. I still find myself a little unsure in regards to the sides in this book given that nothing seems to be straightforward or very black and white, but I guess that is why am enjoying the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Excalibur (2019) #13

Oct 28, 2020

OverallThis was a fun issue of Excalibur, which used politics and intrigue really well as Saturnine tried to play the Braddocks off against each other in order to try and get Brian to be the main protector of the Citadel and thus guard the various gateways into other universes. Thankfully we didn't get too much of apocalypse's subtle plotting in this issue, but he does get referenced. I loved the descriptions within the book about the history of the various swords as well as the history of the Captain Britain Corps. It is a good way to include new readers into the story. Overall. A really fun issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Excalibur (2019) #14

Nov 17, 2020

A really fun issue. That leaves us with more questions than answers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Excalibur (2019) #15

Dec 2, 2020

The moments in the Citadel with Saturnyne and Shogo are juxtaposed brilliantly with the chaos of what is happening as the Mutant army and its lowering numbers continue to battle the Arakki forces.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Excalibur (2019) #16

Dec 30, 2020

I look forward to seeing how all of this pans out in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Excalibur (2019) #17

Feb 2, 2021

Overall. A really fun issue with some great story twists. Which are made more interesting with the addition of Pete Wisdom.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Excalibur (2019) #18

Feb 16, 2021

I've really been enjoying how Richtor's character has developed and I love the idea of introducing more magic into the story as well as figuring out the rules of that magic as well as its costs.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Excalibur (2019) #19

Mar 30, 2021

We also get some brilliant panels of Psylocke as she visits Otherworld in order to track down Betsy. The images of her meditating and conversing with Betsy while she is in the well looked really awesome and when you see those images you can easily see it envisaged in a movie. Hopefully someday Disney will get to Captain Britain and the mythology that surrounds the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Excalibur (2019) #20

Apr 13, 2021

Overall. I really enjoyed THE PHANTOM MENACE! I particularly enjoyed how we got to see a part of Malice's origin story to sort of help make sense of why Betsy and Psylocke are so keen to try and help her.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Excalibur (2019) #21

Jun 15, 2021

A great issue, which looks to be bringing things full circle.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Excalibur (2019) #22

Jul 19, 2021

Overall. A great issue with some brilliant stuff being set up for future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Excalibur (2019) #23

Sep 13, 2021

Overall. This is a really fun issue that offered up a few laughs as well as some nice action beats.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Excalibur (2019) #24

Oct 12, 2021

OverallTini Howard continues to weave an interesting and fun story. I've really enjoyed the inclusion of Merlyn and now King Arthur. Though King Arthur being the bad guy in this is something I am not sure about. Hopefully, Betsy and her team are able to make him see reason. As I suspect Merlyn's influence on Arthur is a huge part of what will wind up resolving this story arc. Furthermore, I'm finding Merlyn being such a closed-minded character to be a little disturbing. However, I do realise that art. Even when it comes to comics is rather subjective. And I am kind of enjoying how this book is challenging some of my pre-conceived ideas when it comes to the King Arthur legends.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Excalibur (2019) #25

Nov 16, 2021

The final few pages are breathtaking and leave us with a fantastic cliffhanger. But as we get reminded of in the issue. Betsy Braddock always comes back.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Excalibur (2019) #26

Dec 21, 2021

Overall. Otherworld is a pretty good way for this book to end. Or maybe begin something new. As it is kind of left open.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
FCBD 2023: Star Trek - Prelude to Day of Blood #1

Jun 25, 2023

This prelude does a wonderful job of adding more layers to a story arc that was started a few months back in the regular ongoing Star Trek comics series. I look forward to reading the first official issue next week to see how it will cross over with the new Defiant book as well as the other Star Trek comic titles that I buy.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
FCBD 2024: Jonny Quest #1

Aug 11, 2024

The team at Dynamite comics have done a wonderful job with this series and really nailed all of the story and character and story beats in such a way that you feel like you are watching the old cartoon series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
FCBD 2024: The Fifteenth Doctor (2024) #1

May 18, 2024

Dan Watters opening story for the Fifteenth Doctor's comic book adventures gives us a pretty strong start by introducing us to a vicious villain that seems determined to put an end to the Doctor's time-traveling heroics. The dialogue between The Doctor and Ruby is fairly solid and felt in line with what we have seen on the TV show thus far.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Fighting American #1

Oct 6, 2017

Fighting America will be released next week and is well worth a look if you love pulp style stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Fighting American (2017) #1

Oct 6, 2017

Fighting America will be released next week and is well worth a look if you love pulp style stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Fighting American (2017) #2

Nov 7, 2017

If you enjoyed the first issue. Then I'd highly recommendyou get this second one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Fire and Ice (2023) #1

Aug 8, 2023

This is a solid story with some spectacular artwork that very much syncs with what fans of the film would have seen on the big screens back when it was released in 1983. Hopefully, this issue will be the launch of a new line of comics for Dynamite.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Fire and Ice (2023) #2

Dec 12, 2023

The StoryIn the fight between Darkwolf and Otwa, the latter is defeated. However, Darkwolf spares his life and heads off. Meanwhile, a conclave of the fire tribes is held to decide a course of action against Juliana and the Ice Tribe. Elsewhere Juliana confirms Nekron as her new Heir given that Kaledan is now gone. Having found Otwa's broken body on retrieved it. Roliel works her magic to renew her son's strength but is interrupted part way by Juliana.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Flash Gordon: Kings Cross #1

Oct 27, 2016

Overall though this is an enjoyable start to another Adventure for Flash Gordon and his friends and I look forward to reading the next issue with great anticipation.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Forgotten Runes: Wizard's Cult (2023) #2

Feb 19, 2024

This was another stand-alone story, which does a nice job of setting up the world that Forgotten Runes is set in. I appreciated how the human villagers were distrustful of magic and the result of that mistrust is very reminiscent of what was done to women who were suspected of being witches during the 15th to 18th century. The book also makes subtle reference to global warming where Willow complains about the smoke coming from the village chimneys when she is returning Leah's father.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Forgotten Runes: Wizard's Cult (2023) #3

Apr 6, 2024

This was a really cool story that spoke to me on quite a few levels.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Forgotten Runes: Wizard's Cult (2023) #4

May 22, 2024

There's a great sequence in the book where Properpine meets a man who needs help with is Horse. However when the man tries to tell her about meeting a man called Godfrey a snake comes out of his mouth and chokes him in the process. Its quite a fun and somewhat scary visual.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Forgotten Runes: Wizard's Cult (2023) #5

Jul 21, 2024

Forgotten Runes: Wizard's Cult has been a good read thus far and one of the books that I look forward to each month. So, I'm looking forward to seeing how it all resolves in the 6th and final issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Freeway Fighter #1

May 8, 2017

You also get a fantastic introduction to the comic by Ian Livingston who talks about his inspiration and how he developed the original Freeway Fighter as a game book.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Freeway Fighter #2

Jun 17, 2017

Two issues in and I'm now looking forward to seeing how things will play out in the third issue, which goes on sale next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Frontiersman #1

Sep 30, 2021

I picked up this first issue of Frontiersman on a whim as I was looking for an issue one of something new to jump on board with. So, I have very little knowledge of the character or any past stories that he may well have featured in. But the little I have read here. I've generally liked it. I quite enjoyed the social commentary of the book and really appreciated Frontiersman's reluctance to go back out into the big bad world to make a stand on something. I particularly enjoyed Frontiersman's conversation with Professor Unicell toward the end of the book. And look forward to seeing where this all goes in the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Frontiersman #2

Nov 9, 2021

Patrick Kindlon adds a little more backstory to the plot as we see a few supervillains observing FM's latest stunts. The discussion between FM and Galaxie Prime is a lot of fun and very current as GP describes themself as being non-binary, which is a fun and interesting commentary on gender politics and identity. But a bulk of the discussion was GP pleading with FM to put them in contact with his Ex.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Frontiersman #3

Dec 14, 2021

A Solid issue with a fantastic setup for next month's chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Frontiersman #4

Jan 11, 2022

OverallWhile there isn't too much action in this issue. We do get a nice exploration of Ethan's past relationship with Bryn and it looks like things may spill over into the next issue. The question is will Bryn stand by her man. Or will she go over to the dark side and stand against him.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Frontiersman #5

Feb 1, 2022

Overall. A fantastic issue to close the story arc on, and a wonderful cliffhanger to keep us all guessing about what is to come next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
G.I. Joe: Saturday Morning Adventures (2022) #1

Feb 21, 2022

A brilliant book, which manages to evoke fond memories of Saturday Morning cartoons from the 1980s. I loved the little moral story tagged on at the end where a young kid is having trouble with his computer and gets a bit of advice from Mainframe who tells the kid that he should always think before taking any drastic actions. This sort of moral story at the end of a story was pretty common in 80s cartoons. I can't wait to see what happens in the next issue. I loved this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
G.I. Joe: Saturday Morning Adventures (2022) #2

Apr 5, 2022

Erik Burnham continues to capture the spirit of G.I. Joe's Saturday Morning Adventures brilliantly.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
G.I. Joe: Saturday Morning Adventures (2022) #3

May 16, 2022

The artist also captured the dynamic movements of the battles between the Joe's and Cobra Command's people. But it was the battle in the arena between Duke and the Beast, which was the highlight.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
G.I. Joe: Saturday Morning Adventures (2022) #4

Jun 21, 2022

Overall. This mini-series has been a lot of fun and has brought back a few fond memories of watching the animated show. It is definitely a book that I will pick up if IDW releases it as a trade paperback at some point.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Giant-Size (2024): Daredevil #1

Jun 17, 2024

A strong issue with a cliffhanger that will get resolved in issue 10 of the regular book that will be on sale soon. As a bonus for this bumper issue we also get a chance to revisit the events of issue 170 by Frank Miller A.K.A. "THE KINGPIN MUST DIE! So this issue is truly a fiskfull of dollars. I can't wait for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Godzilla: Monsters & Protectors: All Hail The King #1

Oct 19, 2022

This is my first Godzilla comic. So I was unaware of past events that this comic referenced. But found the story and the characters to be quite easy to get to know so this felt like a pretty good jumping-on point for the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Godzilla: Monsters & Protectors: All Hail The King #2

Nov 19, 2022

Erik Burnham continues to tease a little bit of the story out as opposed to revealing everything all at once. I loved the sequence where June and May were speaking psychically to Cedric and his friends from Infant Island and can imagine this story being a really cool animated cartoon series. I look forward to reading the next chapter when it drops next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Godzilla: Monsters & Protectors: All Hail The King #3

Dec 13, 2022

Godzilla: Monsters & ProtectorsAll Hail the King! is proving to be a really entertaining book. I really like Cedric as a central character as have met kids like him in real life that think they know it all when they feel they are the sole authority on something. Also, the monster drawings are awesome. The Godzilla character drawing reminds me of the old Hanna Barbara animated show.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Godzilla: Monsters & Protectors: All Hail The King #4

Jan 31, 2023

I continue to enjoy this story as the storyline and art style remind for of a really good Saturday morning cartoon. I love the idea of school kids having a connection to these monsters and being able to have some form of influence over them. I also enjoy seeing how threatened Cedric seems to feel when Karen is around.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Gotham City Monsters #1

Nov 10, 2019

A solid opening issue of Steve Orlando. It has been a few years since I read any of DC Comics take on Frankenstein and had forgotten about his tendency to sometime talk in rhyme. I also loved how Orlando gradually introduces us to a few of the monsters and their tragic backstories throughout the issue. I'm wanting to look up Orca now on the DC Database to find out more about her. Because she is a character I was not familiar with until this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Gotham City Monsters #2

Nov 12, 2019

A fairly strong second issue, which gets the various characters where they need to be in order for Frankenstein to begin the fight back. I look forward to seeing where this will go in the next issue. Too bad there is only going to be six in all.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Gotham City Monsters #3

Nov 14, 2019

A great issue with a nice ending that will lead nicely into issue 4 next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Gotham City Monsters #4

Dec 17, 2019

A solid issue to a series that has been getting better with each chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Gotham City Monsters #5

Jan 11, 2020

OverallSteve Orlando has set things up beautifully for next month's final issue in which we will see Melmoth ultimately defeated, but the how of that remains to be seen given that the closing page of this issue stacks the odds a tad more in Melmoths favor. Either way. I'm looking forward to seeing how all of this ends.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Gotham City Monsters #6

Feb 15, 2020

OverallSteve Orlando concludes what has been an absolutely epic story and leaves himself a little wiggle room to return by having Frankenstein say that he will be waiting to see what other evils will seep into this universe from the multiverse. Hopefully, he will get a chance to tell us that story in another mini-series at some future date.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Green Hornet (2018) #1

Mar 5, 2018

This is a nice jumping on point for new readers and a fantastic way to introduce a new generation of comic book fans to Green Hornet. The artwork is serviceable with some nice touches and Chu's voicings for the various characters are very nicely done.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Green Hornet (2018) #2

Apr 4, 2018

Overall. A solid second issue with a surprising cliffhanger that most fans will likely enjoy while simultaneouslyseeing it as a WTF moment. I look forward to the next issue to see where the story is going to go. Will we be staying in Istanbul for awhile? I hope so.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Green Hornet (2018) #3

May 9, 2018

Amy Chu's characterizations continue to be really strong, but the narrative needs a little more of a push. Hopefully, we'll see that happen in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Green Hornet (2018) #4

Jun 20, 2018

I loved the introduction of Clutch as well as the little insight into the rather confusing family Tree that Kato has.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Grimm (2016) #1

Sep 5, 2016

The art work by M.L. Sanapo pretty solid, but the likeness to the television characters wasn't to great. Which can be bothering on occasion, but in this instance the art was consistent throughout the book. I liked the opening sequence of the robbery.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Grimm (2016) #2

Oct 4, 2016

Again the art work byM.L. Snap services the story, but any likeness to the television characters is not that great, but I do like his interpretation of the characters in spite of this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #1

Feb 1, 2020

OverallThis is a pretty good first issue, but it seems a bit off somehow sidelining the other Guardians in exchange for another group of characters led by Nova Centurian, who doesn't really have the level of charisma or humor. I loved the banter between Rocket and Quill, but just having them minus the other Guardians isn't really working for me. Hopefully, Gamora and the others will be brought in later.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #2

Feb 24, 2020

A fun read, but I'd really like to see Gamora brought into the story, which I think could well happen in next month's issue. Given how this one ended.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #3

Mar 24, 2020

OverallA really solid issue that has some of the key characters doing some proper soul searching before getting ready to go out. Great twist at the end of the story, which concerns Rocket Racoon who could be in real danger given what Gamora's current mood is like.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #4

Jul 19, 2020

Overall. Kind of an expositional issue to set out the new order of things.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #5

Aug 12, 2020

Thankfully the end of the book sees the two Guardian teams end their rivalry, but I can't see the way back being an easy one for them.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #6

Sep 6, 2020

A really enjoyable character-based story, which explores grief and the taking of responsibility for one's actions or inactions and how grief and feelings of guilt can often come into conflict and create an emotional pot noodle of a mess. It will be interesting to see how Nova resolves off of this baggage as the story moves forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #7

Oct 27, 2020

Overall. A promising start to what is likely going to be more of a mystery story. Hopefully, we get a little more action in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #8

Nov 11, 2020

A solid issue with a lot of big reveals in regards to the overall plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #9

Dec 13, 2020

Overall. A really fun issue, which ends with a nice little reunion and one hell of a cliffhanger to keep us in suspense until 2021.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #10

Jan 13, 2021

Overall. A fantastic issue with a brilliantly executed reintroduction of Starlord into the team.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #11

Feb 23, 2021

Overall. This issue is full of brilliant foreshadowing for part two of Starlord and Nova's epic battle against Zeus. That said. This time the Gods will have to deal with a very pissed-off Gamora. Which is a fate that I'd not wish on my worst enemy.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #12

Mar 28, 2021

Overall. A brilliantly fun story and the end of an era for one incarnation of Guardians of The Galaxy and a brilliant introduction to what will likely come next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #13

Apr 20, 2021

I also loved the addition of magic to the science aspects of the story. In particular, Starlord using it to help Groot out. Overall. A fantastic start and some really nice setup for a new story arc. The cliffhanger is magic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #14

May 18, 2021

OverallThis story arc is proving to be a rather good Guardians of the Galaxy story. And as someone that is still quite new to reading their comic book adventures. I can't wait to see how they will fair against Ego. Who we last got to see in the second of the movies.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #15

Jun 28, 2021

Overall. This is developing nicely. I look forward to the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #17

Aug 23, 2021

Overall. A really strong issue with solid dialogue and character development. The story moves on a fair bit and we even get a few nice references to other books in the Marvel universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #18

Sep 27, 2021

Overall. This has been a really fun ride. And having Dr. Doom and the whole science versus magic aspect in the story. Truly made things interesting.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Hard Case Crime: Peepland #1

Oct 12, 2016

Peepland goes on sale today and is a promising start to what could be an interesting look at crime in the mid 1980s.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Harley Quinn and the Birds of Prey #1

Feb 19, 2020

A fun read with a lot of cameos and guest spots from some well down DC Heroes and Villians.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Harley Quinn and the Birds of Prey #2

Jun 29, 2020

I loved the ending of this issue, which sets things up for what I am sure will be a killer third issue. Especially given that Joker will not be working alone when he goes after his ex-girlfriend.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Harley Quinn and the Birds of Prey #3

Oct 7, 2020

I really enjoyed the interactions between Harley and Alfred at the very beginning of the issue. Also the gross-out humor and jokes provide a fair few laughs out loud moments.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Harley Quinn and the Birds of Prey #4

Feb 8, 2021

The action doesn't end there. We get some crazy visuals of The Joker and Harley Sinn as they torture Harley Quinn. The final moments that take place in that room are really well-drawn. In fact, we see real growth. If you get what I mean.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Hawkeye: Kate Bishop (2021) #1

Nov 30, 2021

A fairly strong start. The dialogue is fast and quippy, which is expected and appreciated. This opening chapter sets the story up well but doesn't give too much away. There's enough here to whet your appetite enough to hang in for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Hawkeye: Kate Bishop (2021) #2

Dec 27, 2021

A really enjoyable second issue, which moves the story along and leaves us with a nice cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Hawkeye: Kate Bishop (2021) #3

Jan 19, 2022

The latter part of the book has some solid action beats. And the artist does a great job of portraying the visceral acrobatic movement as Kate takes on Fifi.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Hawkeye: Kate Bishop (2021) #4

Feb 15, 2022

OverallAnother really enjoyable issue, which shows us why so many people fell in love with the character of Kate Bishop. I've really enjoyed the moments throughout all issues thus far where we have heard Kate's internal dialogue. You can almost imagine it as narration in the Marvel TV series, which I hope we'll get to see after the success of the Hawkeye TV series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Hawkeye: Kate Bishop (2021) #5

Mar 20, 2022

Overall. A really solid final issue that does a solid job of setting things up for some future adventures, which I hope to read real soon. It's just a pity that I am no longer able to subscribe to my digital comics due to Amazon's idiotic revamp of Comixology. As their dumb move has definitely impacted our review schedule.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
He-Man & the Masters of the Multiverse #1

Nov 22, 2019

OverallI initially got this issue because I was feeling nostalgic, but have found myself totally sucked into Tim Seeley's story and cannot wait for the next issue. It's brilliant to see some of the different incarnations of He-Man and his friends. I also loved that they brought back Gwildor from the movie.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
He-Man & the Masters of the Multiverse #2

Dec 21, 2019

This issue was okay I suppose, just nothing that had me going wow. It just wasn't anywhere near as strong as the opening issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
He-Man & the Masters of the Multiverse #3

Jan 19, 2020

OverallTim Seeley's journey through the different eras of He-Man continues and this latest issue had a little of everything. Unfortunately, we lose one of the two regular He-Men from this series, but plenty more where that came from. So I am not shedding any tears.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
He-Man & the Masters of the Multiverse #4

Feb 23, 2020

Tim Seeley's narrative has been thankfully fairly easy to follow with each issue, which is a miracle given that with it being set in a different universe in each issue it could be a lot more complex. I really liked the good humor in this issue and the cheesy jokes coming for Orco who was looking to have Holidays named after him. This immediately made this issue feel like the animated show that I remembered watching as a kid in the 80s. So this was a rather nostalgic issue for me.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
He-Man & the Masters of the Multiverse #5

Mar 24, 2020

This has to be the best issue of this series to date. I loved the backstory of this version of Eternia and how He-Man laid it all out for the other He-Man and Prince Kelder. And the way this issue ends has me looking forward to finding out how this will all be concluded. Given that there are no more He-Men left. Only Prince Keldor, Skeletor and Anti-He-Man.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
He-Man & the Masters of the Multiverse #6

May 28, 2020

Even the ending of the story was as sappy and preachy as I remember the 80s TV series to have been.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Hellblazer (2016) #2

Oct 7, 2016

I look forward to issue 3 with great excitement to see where else this mystery will lead.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Hellblazer (2016) #3

Nov 1, 2016

The artwork by Moritat seemed a little inconsistent in this issue. Specially when the scene changed to Swamp Thing and Mercury in the ROT. I'm not sure if it was the colours or the art generally. But the overall image quality seemed to visibly drop a little when in the ROT. It was a little like going for HD to Analogue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Hellblazer: Rebirth #1

Aug 27, 2016

I have a feeling that I may be reading a few more issues of 'The Hellblazer' in the coming months.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Highlander: American Dream #1

Mar 13, 2017

That said. I'd rather IDW have done a comic book based on the character from Highlander The Series. But maybe that is one that they can do in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Highlander: American Dream #2

Mar 22, 2017

All this said. Over all. This comic book prequel story to the first Highlander movie continues to entertain and is a welcome read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Highlander: American Dream #3

Apr 22, 2017

I also enjoyed the fact that it was hinted that the order of Monks that Vazilek is with know about the immortals. It makes sense. If anything the Monks and Holy Men of time would be the most likely to know about the immortals.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Highlander: American Dream #4

May 26, 2017

That moment in the comic encapsulated perfectly the kind of humour that the Highlander films and TV series sometimes had.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Highlander: American Dream #5

Jun 30, 2017

I've really enjoyed this run on Highlander and I hope that IDW are able to get the rights to do more with the characters from the Highlander universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Hit-Girl (2018): Season Two #1

Feb 12, 2019

Either way. This is a pretty strong first volume for Kevin Smith's Hit-Girl story, which still manages to speak volumes, but with very little dialogue, which is a rare thing for a Kevin Smith story given that he is famed for writing extremely witty dialogue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Hit-Girl (2018) #1

Feb 20, 2018

If you love Hit-Girl pick this up. You'll not be disappointed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Hit-Girl (2018): Season Two #2

Mar 12, 2019

Beyond the story about Hit-Girl not being happy about there being a movie about her. Smith also takes time to comment on film producer and sexual predator Harvey Weinstein via the means of his fictitious movie mogul Lew Brothsteen. This commentary leads up to the introduction of a new villain that Hit-Girl will have to take on.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Hit-Girl (2018) #2

Mar 27, 2018

Issue 2 of Hit-Girl will be available in all good comics stores on Wednesday the 28 March.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Hit-Girl (2018) #3

Apr 24, 2018

This issue will be released on Wednesday 25 April. It's not to be missed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Hit-Girl (2018): Season Two #3

Apr 9, 2019

The issue closes out on a cliffhanger, which indicates that things are going to really kick off in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Hit-Girl (2018) #4

May 22, 2018

Overall. A great ending for this story arc and I loved how we get Mindyclosing out the issue by spinning the world globe and stopping it on the next country that she plans to visit, which just happens to be Canada.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Hit-Girl (2018): Season Two #4

May 7, 2019

Overall. A fun run of issues that could only really have been written by Kevin Smith.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Hit-Girl (2018) #5

Jun 19, 2018

Overall. Jeff Lemire and Eduardo Risso do a great job of picking things up from where Millar and Lopez Ortiz left off. The writer and artist chemistry is very apparent and I look forward to seeing what this team brings us over the course of the next three issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Hit-Girl (2018): Season Two #5

Jun 18, 2019

I find myself looking forward to the next issue now. Given that I got through this one really, really quickly.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Hit-Girl (2018) #6

Jul 24, 2018

I also really enjoyed the relationshipthat seemed to be building between the old man and Mindy and hope we get to see that developed a little in next months issue, which will most likely have shed loads of action given how this issue closed out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Hit-Girl (2018): Season Two #6

Jul 16, 2019

A fun issue, which sets things up well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Hit-Girl (2018): Season Two #7

Aug 13, 2019

Overall. A great issue that concludes on a cliffhanger, which will no doubt play a huge part in setting up the finale next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Hit-Girl (2018) #7

Aug 22, 2018

If you have been following this series. Then you'll already know how good it's been, but for those that haven't checked this one out. I'd highly recommendthat you get onto Comixology or look out for the trade because Lemire does a fantastic job of capturing the spirit that Mark Millar imbued into this character and the story is nicely done.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Hit-Girl (2018): Season Two #8

Sep 11, 2019

A satisfying end to what has been a fun story, but I have to wonder if Hit-Girl is going to run out of Villains to fight given that she pretty much dispatches every single one. I'd love to see a rogues gallery for Hit-Girl, but have to wonder if that will ever happen given the death count in these comics.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Hit-Girl (2018): Season Two #9

Oct 15, 2019

Overall. This is a really strong opening first issue, which looks like it could see Hit-Girl facing off against a few enemies as well as perhaps learning a fair bit about Indian culture along the way, which can't be a bad thing.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Hit-Girl (2018) #9

Oct 16, 2018

Overall. I'm definitely in for the next issue to see how this will pan out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Hit-Girl (2018) #11

Dec 11, 2018

The backstory that the writers came up with for the former nun turned gangster would make for an intriguing mini-series in its own right. Kind of like Breaking Bad, but with Crucifixes and Rosemary's.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Hit-Girl (2018) #12

Jan 8, 2019

A fantastic issue to end Hit-Girl's adventure in Rome on which leaves things open for a possible future visit to the famed Italian City in the future thanks to a fun twist.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Holmes & Houdini (2024) #1

Feb 6, 2024

A great opening issue that introduces us to Erica Houdini and her backstory and ends with her meeting Spencer Holmes for the first time. I can't wait for issue two.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Holmes & Houdini (2024) #2

Mar 23, 2024

Honor Vincent continues to spin a fun and interesting adventure. I loved the moment when Holmes first meets Houdini and how quickly they seem to recognize that they share a similar goal. I love all the secret society elements to this story and the fact that the late Harry Houdini left behind a Grimoire of his secrets that only those in the same bloodline as him can read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Holmes & Houdini (2024) #3

Mar 31, 2024

An entertaining story with some great characters. Please Zenescope make this an ongoing comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Howard the Duck (2023) #1

Dec 3, 2023

The various writers and artists have done a great job with this book. The stories are all a laugh-a-minute and give us a less serious look at the Marvel Universe. I loved the character drawings and various backdrops used in the issue. The thought of Howard The Duck leading the Guardians of the Galaxy was hilarious. Marvel should do something with this character and give him his own Disney Plus show. Even if it is just a one-off. It would be fun to see.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Hyde Street (2024) #1

Oct 20, 2024

The best panels though come toward the end of the book where we see Dr. X-Ray get attacked by his latest money-making scheme, which happens to be a rare kind of Monkey that goes berserk when the Dr tries to feed it a banana.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Hyde Street (2024) #2

Dec 3, 2024

Overall, I'm thoroughly enjoying this series and can't wait to see where it goes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Iron Fist (2017) #1

May 26, 2017

This first issue of the latest story arc is not up to that standard, but as yet it is early days.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Iron Fist (2017) #4

Jun 16, 2017

Will he return to Kun Lun to become reacquainted with Show-Lao or will he wind up having to return to New York?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Iron Fist (2017) #5

Jul 13, 2017

This was a pretty solid Iron Fist story, but didn't really live up to the high standards set by Ed Brubaker and Matt Fraction in their 'Immortal Iron Fist' run from 2008.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Iron Fist (2022) #1

Feb 20, 2022

The StoryHaving given up his powers as the Iron Fist to save the world. Danny Rand has continued to use his Kung Fu to work as a crime fighter, but his current job of keeping him from a dinner date with his friend Luke Cage. But when a mysterious new Iron Fist shows up who is not properly able to channel the Chi of Shou-Loa. Danny's curiosity gets the better of him as he wants to try and help the mysterious stranger. However, before they can be caught. The new Iron Fist makes a fast getaway back to K'un-Lun.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Iron Fist (2022) #2

Apr 4, 2022

Meanwhile, back in K'un-Lun Lin-Lie struggles to handle the demon sword shards in his hands from interfering with his ability to channel Shao Lou's, Dragon Chi. But he also has to deal with a few people who are not too happy with him being the new Iron Fist.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Iron Fist 50th Anniversary Special (2024) #1

Aug 23, 2024

A great book that truly does celebrate Iron Fist with a series of short stories with themes that fans of the comic book series will be all too familiar with. This is more of a sample of the kind of adventures that Iron Fist has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
It Happened On Hyde Street (2024): Devour #1

Nov 10, 2024

Overall, Devour is a fantastic read. The characters are beautifully written, and the dark twist is executed brilliantly.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
James Bond #9

Sep 13, 2016

I look forward to reading issue four of this book as and when it comes out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
James Bond (2019) #1

Dec 3, 2019

I'm looking forward to getting more of this series as it comes out and can't wait to see what the writing team of Vita Ayala and Danny Lore will come up with next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
James Bond (2019) #2

Jan 15, 2020

OverallVita Ayala and Danny Lore have delivered an issue here which is basically about Bond and Keyes getting used to working together, which kind of made it feel like they were treading water a little bit. That said we are given an incentive to come back next month as we are left with a pretty good cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
James Bond (2019) #3

Feb 12, 2020

OverallThis was a fairly good conclusion to the current story arc, but also an origin story of sorts for the partnership of James Bond and Brandy Keys, which is going to continue into the next story arc. As a long term Bond fan. I'm not entirely sure how I feel about his being partnered up for the long term, but I do like the partnership that has formed here in that Brandy seems very much like James Bond in that she is a rule-breaker, but unlike Bond, she is across all the details. Whereas Bond is always off the cuff in that he improvises a lot more than he plans. All I ask of the writers is this, please don't have Bond and Brandy fall in love'. It never ends well when Bond falls in love.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
James Bond (2019) #4

Mar 15, 2020

Overall. A new story, which kind of feels like a continuation of the last story arc in some ways. But I will keep with it to see where it goes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
James Bond (2019) #5

Jun 11, 2020

With the reveal of the big bad. I can't wait to see how this all pans out in next month's issue because this story is really starting to heat up. Bond better hope that there are not any swamps nearby if he is going by past experiences.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
James Bond (2019) #6

Aug 3, 2020

Issue 6 of ‘James Bond' will hit comic book stores this Wednesday.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
James Bond: Agent of Spectre #1

Mar 5, 2021

In this story. Bond is middle age and that gets referenced as being somewhat of a negative thing given the life expectancy of 00 agents.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
James Bond: Agent of Spectre #2

Apr 6, 2021

The briefing at the start of the comic in which it is Blofeld feeding Bond information was incredibly well written and well thought out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
James Bond: Agent of Spectre #3

May 6, 2021

Agent of Spectre continues to be a highlight of my month and will hopefully continue in that vein.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
James Bond: Agent of Spectre #4

Jun 8, 2021

I can't wait for the finale next month. Man if only I had a time machine.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
James Bond: Agent of Spectre #5

Jul 20, 2021

This final issue of 'James Bond: Agent of Spectre' delivers. Christos N. Gage has consistently impressed throughout this story arc giving us a Bond story that feels extremely cinematic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
James Bond: Felix Leiter #1

Jan 11, 2017

This is a fairly good start. Not spectacular by any stretch of the imagination, but it's a strong enough start to keep me interested enough to read the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
James Bond: Hammerhead #1

Oct 6, 2016

As opening issues go. This was pretty solid story telling. I'm sold enough on this to keep my eyes open for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
James Bond: Himeros #1

Oct 13, 2021

OverallRodney Barnes makes a strong debut with a story that looks like it could unfold in a similar style to your average Daniel Craig style James Bond story. Having Bond investigates the murder of a sex trafficker and arms dealer works. But the addition of Sarah Richmond who also has combat training, but happens to know where all the skeletons are makes for some intriguing possabilities. Has to be said though. Fuso's drawing of the assassin Kino kind of resembles a younger Stephen King. Similar hairstyle and jawline.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
James Bond: Himeros #2

Nov 12, 2021

Himeros is beginning to shape up to be an interesting James Bond story given that it seems a lot more grounded than previous adventures.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
James Bond: Himeros #3

Dec 8, 2021

I'm looking forward to seeing how the visit to the island goes down in next month's book.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
James Bond: Himeros #4

Jan 18, 2022

James Bond: Himeros #4 will be on sale in all good comic book stores on Wednesday 19, January.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
James Bond: Himeros #5

Feb 17, 2022

Despite this one criticism. I've really enjoyed the ride and would be interested in checking out further Bond stories from Barnes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
James Bond: Moneypenny (One Shot) #1

Sep 4, 2017

I think Houser may have been able to provide a fuller Moneypenny story had she had more than just the one issue to impress us with.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
James Bond: Origin #1

Sep 4, 2018

OverallThis is a very strong start for James Bond Origins and I look forward to seeing where the story goes in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
James Bond: Origin #2

Oct 2, 2018

Why no one has ever tried to adapt something like this to a television series or a series of films is beyond me. I'd love to see something like this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
James Bond: Origin #3

Nov 6, 2018

OverallA fantastic issue, which provides a cliff edge situation that will really test James Bond's metal, but also a really exciting read for fans of 007.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
James Bond: Origin #4

Dec 11, 2018

It's just sad that we'll have to wait a whole month to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
James Bond: Origin #5

Jan 15, 2019

A great issue, which transitions fairly smoothly into bonds next mission, which will see him going to Belgium.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
James Bond: Origin #6

Feb 11, 2019

OverallThis is a great issue, which shows James Bond at a very early stage in his spying career and highlights just how cold and precise the future version of Bond is to this more gullible and somewhat devil may care version is.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
James Bond: Origin #7

Mar 13, 2019

I look forward to seeing what the next issue will have to offer and seeing how Bond will execute his escape from the Russian boat.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
James Bond: Origin #8

Apr 10, 2019

I loved the couple of pages where Bond is going over his personal checklist of what he should do and what he should be prepared for. We get the sense that he is strategizing and trying to brace himself for all possible outcomes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
James Bond: Origin #9

May 8, 2019

Overall, though this has concluded what has been another enjoyable adventure for the younger James Bond. I'm actually surprised that a TV series or movie series of Bonds earlier adventures have not been attempted. Which is why I take such great pleasure in reading this particular Dynamite series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
James Bond: Origin #10

Jun 11, 2019

Having Bond call on Eddie for help made for an interesting twist and could make for interesting reading as things develop given the history that these two characters share.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
James Bond: Origin #11

Jul 10, 2019

Overall. A really fun issue with lots of intrigue and some interesting possibilities for next months final issue of this story arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
James Bond: Origin #12

Aug 14, 2019

Overall. A wonderful story arc, which I can see myself revisiting at some stage in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
James Bond: The Body #1

Jan 9, 2018

Overall. This was a pretty solid first issue, which has enough story to keep me involved for issue 2, which I should imagine will be out next month. There's no doubt about it. Bond is back!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
John Constantine: Hellblazer #1

Nov 28, 2019

A solid if not a slow start with some really impressive artwork.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
John Constantine: Hellblazer #2

Dec 22, 2019

I enjoyed this second issue more than the opening installment. I loved the references to William Blake and how that played into the location in which the angels were appearing. This has set things up wonderfully for the third issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
John Constantine: Hellblazer #3

Jan 26, 2020

Overall. A fairly strong opening story arc. I look forward to seeing what else Spurrier can come up with.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
John Constantine: Hellblazer #4

Mar 1, 2020

A promising start with a memorable and fun character in the form of Tommy Willowtree. I look forward to reading what happens in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
John Constantine: Hellblazer #5

Apr 1, 2020

The close of this issue opens up a bit of mystery and presents us with a villain that could well prove a challenge for Constantine. I'm looking forward to seeing how this will progress in the months ahead.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
John Constantine: Hellblazer #6

Jun 5, 2020

A great story that has a very important point to make.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
John Constantine: Hellblazer #7

Jun 28, 2020

A promising start to what could be the best story arc we have seen to date in 2020 for this book. I enjoyed the backdrop of the fishermen blaming their misfortunes on the French and the Tory MP talking about the fishing quotas that were supposedly being imposed by the EU. But the best part was how the Merwoman is relating her story to us as well as to Constantine. It will be interesting to see how Constantine will help the Merwoman get some retribution in the second part of this story, which will hopefully release at some stage in July.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
John Constantine: Hellblazer #8

Aug 1, 2020

I really enjoyed the analogy that Constantine uses to describe magic. How he compares magic to a school of salmon and the miracle that is migration in terms of all the crap that they put up with only to move to the exact same spot that they left the year prior. Overall. A fun read and perhaps one of the more tragic Constantine stories that we have had to date.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
John Constantine: Hellblazer #9

Sep 1, 2020

OverallSimon Spurrier comes up with a neat story, which plays on many of the conspiracy theories to do with the British Monarchy and takes advantage of some very recent scandals. Namely the whole deal with Prince Andrew and his associations with Weinstein. Lucky not a single Pizza join was soiled with Royalty in the making of the book. The set up of the Royal Family's fondness of Horse Racing and Horse breeding was brilliantly utilized to give us a Unicorn story, but with a Constantine twist.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
John Constantine: Hellblazer #11

Nov 2, 2020

Aaron Campbell continues to provide some brilliant artwork for this series. I loved the atmosphere he manages to evoke with his rough penciled outlines for the winding stairs that lead to what is under Parliament. The drawing of Clem Thurso is also quite freaky. Especially in late pages when you see him with part of his face mask removed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
John Constantine: Hellblazer #12

Nov 29, 2020

I also really enjoyed how Constantine went about setting the bait for his older self. Overall. This is a satisfying conclusion to what has been a great 12 issue run. In fact, I'd love to see this done as an animated movie at some stage.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
John Wick #1

Nov 21, 2017

Overall. This is a very entertaining first issue, which lays some solid foundations for what is to come, which will likely be Wick being hunted by the Guild for his freelancing ways.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
John Wick #2

Apr 18, 2018

Overall. A very enjoyable second issue that builds off of the mythology of the two films and glimpses John Wick's murky past. And yes he does seem rather friendlywith a cat.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Joker: The Man Who Stopped Laughing #1

Oct 10, 2022

I have fun while reading this and quite enjoyed the two contrasting styles.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
JSA (2024) #1

Nov 12, 2024

The art in the second part of the book was also a highlight, showing the original JSA members in action. However, we're still left wondering where they are and how this ties into the main storyline.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
JSA (2024) #2

Dec 10, 2024

Jeff Lemire crafts an engaging story here, weaving in plenty of time jumps and flashbacks that, while intriguing, can get a little confusing at times. The characters are well-written, and the interpersonal conflicts feel genuine and believable. Overall, it's a solid issue, though there's still a lot left to uncover before the full picture comes into focus.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Jupiter's Legacy: Vol. 2 #3

Sep 1, 2016

The closing pages of this issue give us much to look forward to. And I really like Skyfox's simple plan to kick some ass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice Inc: The Avenger - Faces Of Justice #1

Jun 28, 2017

This opening issue is very much set up. But its pretty good set up in that there is nothing putting me off returning to the book for issue two just yet. I've enjoyed how Benson has played counter arguments at his accusers. It kind of puts me in mind of the sort of arguments that Sherlock Holmes would make if he was in the same situation. Over all. This is a pretty solid first issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Justice Society of America (2022) #1

Dec 11, 2022

I'm looking forward to seeing how this story plays out. And will try and pre-order the next issue on Amazon. But wish they'd let me just subscribe as it saves me having to look for stuff each month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Justice Society of America (2022) #2

Feb 27, 2023

As Dr. Fate tried to help. He finds himself transported to the near future where he has an unusual green-skinned apprentice. However, he is finally able to find a few fragments of Helena's life that he connects to.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Justice Society of America (2022) #3

Mar 24, 2023

Overall. A fun issue with a brilliant cliffhanger ending that will keep everyone guessing until next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass (2018) #1

Feb 13, 2018

Overall. This is a strong first issue, which turns everything you think you know about Kick-Ass on its head and presents a less comedic version of the character who has real issues balancing life with the job of a vigilante. Bring on issue 2.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass (2018) #2

Mar 20, 2018

Kick-Ass #2 will hit comic book stores on Wednesday and it is well worth picking up.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass (2018) #3

Apr 17, 2018

We get left with a really big cliffhanger in this issue that will have readers pulling their hair out for an entire month while waiting to see what happens next. One thing's for sure. The shit is very much likely to hit the fan. It's going to get messy.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass (2018) #4

May 15, 2018

This was a fabulous issue, which went some way to not only escalating the story when it comes to the villains. But it also escalates things with regards to Patience's family life given that one of the gang members she takes on is related. The closing page of this issue pretty will pretty much keep fans guessing for the next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Kick-Ass (2018) #7

Sep 18, 2018

Steve Niles does a pretty decent job of taking over writing duties from Millar and gives us the beginnings of a new story in which Patience is still trying to juggle things with regards to her double life as a working mum by day and vigilante crime fighter by night.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass (2018) #8

Oct 9, 2018

OverallThis is another solid issue, which has set things in motion that are going to make for some epic battles in the months to come. While the cliffhanger is not as exciting as last month, it does have you gasping and wondering if the game is up for Patience.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Kick-Ass (2018) #9

Nov 6, 2018

I look forward with tons and tons of anticipation for next months issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass (2018) #10

Dec 4, 2018

I very much look forwardto the next issue in January because judging by the final page of this issue things are really going to kick off.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Kick-Ass (2018) #11

Jan 8, 2019

This is a really strong issue, which ties up a few loose ends and leaves us with a few questions to ponder.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass (2018) #12

Feb 12, 2019

Overall. A solid story, with a bit of an anticlimacticending.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Kick-Ass (2018) #13

Apr 16, 2019

OverallSteve Niles is doing a good job of getting his ducks in a row for what looks like it could be a promising new arc. I'm enjoying the twist in regards to Maurice, which has been set up well, but the surprise was the return of Kick-Ass husband, who we never really expected to see again.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Kick-Ass (2018) #14

May 14, 2019

I look forward to seeing where all of this winds up taking us.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Kick-Ass (2018) #15

Jun 26, 2019

I'm really enjoying the glimpses that we are getting of Patience personal life, but I think it would be cool to perhaps see a little more of that to give a bit more of a sense of what Patience is fighting for.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass (2018) #16

Aug 6, 2019

Given the way this issue ends. I can't wait for the next one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Kick-Ass (2018) #17

Sep 11, 2019

Overall. Kick-Ass #17 is another fun-filled and edgy chapter of what has been a fantastic story arc thus far.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Kick-Ass (2018) #18

Oct 29, 2019

Steve Niles gave us an epic final issue here and sets up things for issue in fine style. I am betting that the fans will go totally nuts when they read this issue. Especially when they get to the final couple of pages. It's totally worth it. Trust us.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass vs Hit-Girl (2020) #1

Nov 10, 2020

This opening issue sets things up brilliantly. But it also shows me just how much I have missed given that Maurice had only awoken from his coma and just begun his campaign of blackmail when I last read Kick-Ass. Nevertheless, I had little problem picking up the story and was caught up pretty quickly. Steve Niles writing is quick and fast and doesn't overly rely on exposition. Instead, he uses dialogue and action to move things along, which allows Marcelo Frusin lots of room to use his imagery to push the story forward. In short, this first issue hits really hard and pulls you in, and doesn't let go. It's a brilliant opener.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass vs Hit-Girl (2020) #2

Dec 15, 2020

On the whole, this is a brilliant issue and a fantastic example of an artist and writer that are truly in sync with each other. I loved how the writer managed to give us Hit-Girl and Kick-Ass's parallel stories prior to the meeting on the final page. The build-up is brilliantly executed in my opinion. For instance, the way in which Kick-Ass is eavesdropping on Kick-Ass as she takes out the gang members. It's all brilliantly done. I can't wait for the next issue to come round.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Kick-Ass vs Hit-Girl (2020) #3

Jan 12, 2021

Overall. This is a solid issue that flies by. I can't wait until next month to see how the story continues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Kick-Ass vs Hit-Girl (2020) #5

Mar 16, 2021

Overall. A satisfying end to what has been a great 5 issue run.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Killer Instinct #1

Sep 15, 2017

I look forward to seeing where this goes in the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
King Kong: The Great War (2023) #1

May 14, 2023

The StoryIn 1917 a German U – Boat Captain and his crew washes up on the shore of an uncharted island in the Pacific Ocean. As the Captain awakes he reconnects with his crew and learns that there doesn't seem to be a way out from the island. In order to try and keep his soldiers safe. The Captain orders that they take the high ground in order to hopefully get away from whatever it was that shipwrecked them. Little do they know of the terrors that await them as the legendary Ape-God King Kong awaits them.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
King Kong: The Great War (2023) #2

Jul 11, 2023

This second issue ends with a brilliant visual, which acts as a wonderful bit of foreshadowing for what is to come. As we see the Captain and his men make camp in what appears to be one of Kong's hand prints.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
King Kong: The Great War (2023) #3

Aug 30, 2023

A great third issue that continues the story and gives us some of the most gruesome deaths we have seen to date. It will be interesting to see how the Captain and his crew cope with Kong, who is watching them very closely.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
King Kong: The Great War (2023) #4

Dec 4, 2023

Alex Cox is doing a fantastic job with this book. I love how he has humanized a group of hardened German Soldiers from the First Great War and made me like and admire them. I continue to love how Cox has used the Captain Diarie entries to tell the story and I am wondering how this story will end. Will the Captain make it off the Island or will he be added to the already plentiful collection of skulls on the island? I don't know the answer to that, but can't wait to find out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
King Kong: The Great War (2023) #5

Apr 8, 2024

Overall, with only the Captain and one other survivor left. I look forward to seeing what happens in issue six.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
King Of Spies #1

Nov 30, 2021

King of Spies will be available in all good comics stores on Wednesday 1 December. It's a fabulous early Christmas pressie, only minus the useless gift wrapping.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
King Of Spies #2

Jan 12, 2022

OverallThis is a fantastic second issue, which sees the events from issue one escalate and then some. This is very much the anti-james bond book and gives us a secret agent that has suddenly grown a set and is truly looking to question the morality of the government and the systems that he has spent his life protecting.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
King Of Spies #3

Feb 9, 2022

We also get some nice POV panels when one of Roland's old Toff mates is describing how smart piss works. It's nearly enough to put one off of using public toilets. Surely there is a counter gadget for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Kingsman: The Red Diamond #1

Sep 7, 2017

If you are a fan of the previous two story arcs. You will not be disappointedwith this new arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Klaus: The Crisis in Xmasville #1

Dec 11, 2017

Morrison's use of the commercialization of Christmas to tell this story is done in a fun way without being too in your face. The artwork throughout is top notch. Especially when we see so many zombie Santa'son the page. East slightly different than the others.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Klaus: The Life and Times of Joe Christmas #1

Dec 20, 2019

Overall I enjoyed this, but at 5.99 for digital purchase on Comixology. I think the price is a tad steep. But I will most likely try and pick up a physical copy at some stage because it would work well as an alternative advent calendar.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Konungar: War of Crowns #1

May 18, 2018

This is a great book that most fantasy fans, as well as those that love Norse mythology, will really enjoy. I can't wait to see the second issue of this when it comes out. It's a brilliant book.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Lady Baltimore: The Witch Queens #1

Mar 27, 2021

The StoryVery little time is wasted here as we get thrown right into the story. Indeed, this opening issue picks up with Lady Baltimore fighting against the evil Witch Yelena. We soon learn that Sofia is on a rescue mission and is out to help Rigo and members of the Orphic Society get out of hostile territory. Just when it seems that the game is up. Sofia's friend Imogen swoops in and uses some of her magic to contain Yelena so that Sofia can rescue her old friend Rigo. But even in captivity, Yelena is still dangerous.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Lady Baltimore: The Witch Queens #2

Apr 26, 2021

OverallThis was a really strong second issue. The writing was fantastic. I particularly enjoyed the discussion between Lady Baltimore and Rigo about the merits and the pitfalls of torture. I also enjoyed the sequence where Charlie Kidd gets a bit too close to Yelena and nearly pays dearly for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Lady Baltimore: The Witch Queens #3

Jun 1, 2021

OverallChristopher Golden and Mike Mignola continue to spin a brilliant story with this adventure. I'm really excited to see how this story will evolve over the next few issues. The two writers have managed to give us some likable characters and some truly awesome villains. I mean how can you not love a good old-fashioned pulp story that gives us Nazi Witches. More of the same, please.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Lady Baltimore: The Witch Queens #4

Jun 27, 2021

Lady Baltimore: The Witch Queens continues to be a monthly event for me. I love pulp storytelling and also enjoy anything to do with the occult within any given fictional narrative. The plot twist involving Rigo and his betrayal is brilliantly executed as was the backstory for Einer the Warlock. With the Hexencorps pretty much invading most of Europe. We get left with a brilliant cliffhanger for this penultimate issue of what has been one of the most fun comic books of this year.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Lady Baltimore: The Witch Queens #5

Nov 1, 2021

I also loved the fact that the Golem is referred to by name and fast becomes a character in his own right. Indeed, it would have been oh so easy for the writers to just have him as a witch killing machine.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Lake of Fire #1

Aug 27, 2016

Over all though. This story has got off to a bit of a mixed start. But I'm intrigued enough to come back and try the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Lone Ranger (2018) #1

Oct 1, 2018

I'm most likely on board with this for at least one more issue to see where it goes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Lone Ranger (2018) #2

Nov 7, 2018

OverallThis is another fun issue, which mixes a little history with the politics and social mores of the period. Mark Russell's writing treads very carefully with some rather difficult subject matter. He manages to portray the casual racism of the period really well and Tonto's brief quip about hiding in plain sight among other natives illustrates the ignoranceof the period without it coming off as too preachy.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Long Lost #1

Nov 21, 2017

Matthew Erman'sdialogue for his characters is lots of fun. I loved the interaction between the older sister and her dog, but most amusing was the interaction between the younger sister and the old lady on the bus. I've actually met people like this on buses and usually went home thinking, ‘What?'

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Lord of the Jungle (2022) #1

Nov 15, 2022

The first book ends with an older Tarzan returning to the Jungle where he meets up with his old friend.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Lord of the Jungle (2022) #2

Dec 21, 2022

OverallThis second issue does a great job of building on what we saw play out in the first issue. But also takes time to make some interesting comments on how a mechanized jungle can be just as brutal if not more so than the old jungle that Tarzan grew up in. This comment is an observation made by Bouanga when two thugs try to mug Tarzan, but very soon reconsider their actions when Tarzan stands up to them.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Lord of the Jungle (2022) #3

Feb 6, 2023

OverallAs a life long fan of Tarzan in comics, animation, and film. I continue to enjoy this take on the character and hope that our friends at Dynamite comics continue to release more stories about the Lord of The Jungle in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Lord of the Jungle (2022) #4

Mar 28, 2023

The situation of Tarzan being jumped sees Bouanga pick up his story from where he left off in the last chapter. Tarzan is looking to save his ape family from the crooked and evil Shaw, but Shaw gives Tarzan an ultimatum. He demands that Tarzan go to the Valley of Mist and get him some precious jewels. Initially, Tarzan says no. But when shaw changes threatens to kill Bouanga. Tarzan heads off into the Jungle in a race against time to steal Shaw's jewels from the people who live in the Valley.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Lord of the Jungle (2022) #5

May 16, 2023

This works pretty well as a penultimate chapter to this story arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Lord of the Jungle (2022) #6

Jul 18, 2023

This was a solid story and a very worthy addition to the legacy of Tarzan. It's just a shame that Dynamite has to title this comic Lord of the Jungle due to licensing reasons because this was a very worthy Tarzan story that would make for a great movie.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Luke Cage (2017) #1

May 23, 2017

As things stand. Luke Cage is pretty much a beaten man by the close of this issue. But the fight sequence and the panels didn't really leap out at me or inspire that dropped jaw moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Luke Cage (2017) #2

Jul 4, 2017

Overall this was an exciting second issue, which gave us a bit more of a mystery to ponder and introduced some interesting new characters to proceedings.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Luke Cage (2017) #3

Jul 26, 2017

Over all this is the best issue to date. I look forward to seeing how all this gets wrapped up.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Luke Cage (2017) #4

Aug 17, 2017

Yet another great issue of this series by David F. Walker. I absolutely loved Bernstein's speech where he tries to justify his actions and also tries to claim credit for making Luke Cage who he is.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Luke Cage (2017) #5

Sep 21, 2017

The artwork in this issue was as consistent as ever. Great issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Luke Cage (2017) #166

Oct 26, 2017

In regards to the story. This is a great issue, which promises to be interesting as we learn more of what The Ringmaster has in store for Luke.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Luke Cage (2017) #167

Nov 28, 2017

The next issue takes us to the mines, which are the very heart of this arcs mystery. Why is it that no one has returned or lived to tell the tale?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Luke Cage (2017) #170

Mar 15, 2018

Overall. This is a nice final issue of the ‘Caged' mini-series, which would work just as well as a stand-aloneissue. Given that other than Luke returning home. It had very little to do with the story arc, which really closed out in the last issue. But as its own thing. This issue works well and offers up some nice respite from the intensity and action of the previous 4 issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
M.A.S.K.: Mobile Armored Strike Kommand: Revolution #1

Oct 1, 2016

M.A.S.K. Revolution is a great introduction to this world and a fantastic jumping on point if you are a newbie like me. I can't recommend this highly enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Marvel's Voices: Legacy #1

Mar 1, 2021

The stories within the book range from cute to rather dark. It truly has something for every reader. And is fun to read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Marvel's Voices: Legacy #1

Mar 1, 2021

The stories within the book range from cute to rather dark. It truly has something for every reader. And is fun to read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Masked #1

Nov 25, 2016

For a first issue. This does the job perfectly and it is a comic that I will most likely follow in the months to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Mike Hammer #1

Jun 28, 2018

Mickey Spillane's Mike Hammer is out now in all good comics stores and is well worth a lookif your a fan of crime thrillers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Mike Hammer #2

Jul 31, 2018

Marcelo Salazais really strong in this issue. He captures the mood and noir world of Hammer perfectly. There's a wonderful series of panels of Hammer and Helen naked on the bed with cigarettesmoke tastefullyprotecting Helen's modesty. There is also a wonderful fight sequence in which Mike dispatches Carman's main goons. I also liked the panels in the Zero Clue with the jazz band playing. The artwork captured the mood perfectly.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Minky Woodcock: The Girl Who Electrified Tesla #1

Apr 22, 2021

It's a fantastic read and I can't wait for the second issue. Hopefully, we'll get to issue 369.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Minky Woodcock: The Girl Who Electrified Tesla #2

May 25, 2021

Overall. A great second issue, which leaves things open with a fantastic cliffhanger, which makes me think that Minky has been set up to take a fall.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Minky Woodcock: The Girl Who Electrified Tesla #3

Jun 21, 2021

Overall. I can't wait to get my hands on the next issue. A great read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Minky Woodcock: The Girl Who Electrified Tesla #4

Jul 27, 2021

Overall I'm getting the trade of this. But I'm also glad that I got all the issues on Comixology. If you enjoy a mystery, with a bit of fun history thrown into the mix. Then this book comes highly recommended. I look forward to more Minky Woodcock in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Moriarty: Clockwork Empire #1

Feb 24, 2023

The ArtworkThe Artwork in Moriarty: The Clockwork Empire is fantastic. The opening few pages show us Mr. Hyde attacking London's China Town and the panels are all in shadow and have a wonderful murky quality to them which adds to the mayhem that is about to happen. By comparison, the panels set in the Diogenes Club are bright and colourful but with their own distinctive look and style as we see some nice period work that accurately depicts the fashions of London in 1899.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Moriarty: Clockwork Empire #2

Mar 27, 2023

Overall. The writing team is doing a great job on this series and I can't wait for the next issue to drop.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Moriarty: Clockwork Empire #3

Apr 24, 2023

This was a really strong third issue that upped the urgency and scale of the threat that Lady Li Mei represents to London. Further adding to the drama is that London has run out of Morphine, which could be a problem if Li Mei unleashes more of her monsters on the city.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Moriarty: Clockwork Empire #4

May 22, 2023

Overall. This book has been a lot of fun and I hope that we get to see more of it. But maybe do some stuff more from Moriarty's viewpoint.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
My Date With Monsters #1

Nov 15, 2021

A great first issue with a fantastic story that I can't wait to read more of.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
My Date With Monsters #2

Dec 20, 2021

OverallThis second issue of My Date With Monstersadds a few new twists to the story. And I love how outrageously brilliantly written the Kabuki Masked monster's dialogue is. I can't wait to get my mitts on issue three.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
My Date With Monsters #3

Jan 25, 2022

Overall. A really fun issue. I can't wait to see what happens next and maybe seeing a few more monsters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
My Date With Monsters #4

Mar 1, 2022

A really funny issue with some truly sick humor. Moreover, the banter between Risa, Yamada, and Croak is quite funny. Especially when Yamada has the realization that Croak is more dangerous than the Mares. Overall. This was great fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
My Date With Monsters #5

Apr 2, 2022

Paul Tobin brings My Date With Monsters to a satisfying conclusion. The story comes to a close and the good guys or maybe bad guys depending on your point of view, win the day. However, the big revelation within the story does give Risa some food for thought and has her asking if she can ever be truly happy? Will she get together with Genka? That much is left open.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Mycroft Holmes #2

Sep 10, 2016

Again the action in Apocalypse handbook is brilliantly drawn and laid out and has a certain cinematic quality that makes you want to see this as a movie or even an animated film. Hopefully someone out there with the skills and the passion will one day make the film.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Mycroft Holmes #3

Oct 25, 2016

Titan Comics have really found a top class team here and I hope that they get to do a lot more work with Titan in the years to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Mycroft Holmes #4

Dec 23, 2016

The writing of this comic continues to be top notch. Raymond Obstfeild has been doing an awesome job of transcribing Kareem Abdul-Jabbar's novel into a comic book and has been helped massively by the brilliant art of Joshua Cassara.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #1

Apr 7, 2020

A solid start, which has me on the edge of my seat for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #2

Jul 7, 2020

This issue will hit comic book stores and Comixology on Wednesday 8 July.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #4

Sep 2, 2020

Overall. A solid issue that keeps the mystery train running while also managing to give us a nice balance of character development and fun moments.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #5

Oct 8, 2020

Overall. A really solid issue, which puts things in place for next month's finale, which I'm sure will prove to be a very satisfying end to what has been a pretty cool mystery.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #6

Nov 14, 2020

Overall. This has been a great series with a satisfying mystery that has had enough twists and turns to keep us guessing all the way through. It really kept you guessing and the revelation of the real killer was a total surprise.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Nancy Drew (2018) #1

Jun 12, 2018

Overall. This was an okay introduction and will work for those new to Nancy Drew, but I was a little underwhelmedby the fact that so much time was spent on Nancy getting re-acquaintedwith the Bayport locals. There didn't seem to be any clues or leads included in this first issue. Hopefully, we see some forward momentum in issue 2 next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Nancy Drew (2018) #2

Jul 10, 2018

The Artwork by Jen St-ongecontinues to do some really nice things. I loved the drawings of Nancy and the gang when they were kids exploring the same caves and the facial expressions are really well drawn. There is kind of a Japanese influence to the drawing with the use of rather large eyes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Nancy Drew (2018) #3

Aug 8, 2018

The artwork from Jen St-onge continues to impress and has a rather Saturdaymorning cartoon feel to it with a touch of anime. I also liked her drawings of the various locations throughout Bayport. Specifically the old workplace of Pete's mother, which looks like a pretty roughneck place to hang out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Nancy Drew (2018) #4

Sep 11, 2018

This is another strong issue, which has me intrigued enough to tune in next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Nancy Drew And The Hardy Boys: The Big Lie #1

Mar 1, 2017

I'm definitely in for the second issue to see where this goes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Nancy Drew And The Hardy Boys: The Big Lie #2

Apr 4, 2017

This issue continued the story brilliantly from where things left off last issue and gave us a pretty fun caper. Sure cheating at a poker game is a little bit of a cliche, but it was executed brilliantly in this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Nancy Drew And The Hardy Boys: The Big Lie #3

May 12, 2017

Thus far this story is proving to be very enjoyable. I hope that it continues in this way. So we can enjoy more stories in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Nancy Drew And The Hardy Boys: The Big Lie #4

Jun 19, 2017

Dynamite have done a great job of bringing Nancy Drew and the Hardy Boys back for a modern day audience and in so many ways make up for the 2007 Nancy Drew movie, which didn't really find its audience.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Nancy Drew And The Hardy Boys: The Big Lie #5

Jul 17, 2017

I've really enjoyed this run of Nancy Drew and with only an issue or two left to go I am anxious to learn whether it will be a license that Dynamite will hold onto and perhaps do more with in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Nancy Drew And The Hardy Boys: The Big Lie #6

Aug 29, 2017

Although this final issue wraps up one story. The threads are left hanging for another, which will see Nancy and the Boys investigating a mysterious syndicate.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Newbury & Hobbes: The Undying #1

Sep 11, 2018

This is a solid first issue for Newbury and Hobbes. The world building is really well thought out and we get left with a wonderful cliffhanger to whet are appetites for what lies ahead in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Newbury & Hobbes: The Undying #2

Oct 8, 2018

George Mann does a great job with the dialogue and the interpersonal exchanges between the various characters. I especially enjoyed the build-uphe created for the characters as they planed their daring jailbreak. And I also enjoyed the cliffhanger that this issue leaves off on and what it reveals to the heroic Newbury and Hobbes, but what will it mean as the story moves on in next months installment. I guess we'll have to wait and see.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Newbury & Hobbes: The Undying #4

Jan 30, 2019

The issue ends with potential for another crime for the duo to investigate. I hope we get to see that one in a new comic series because I really liked these two characters and the world in which they occupy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Nick Fury (2017) #1

Jul 20, 2017

As first issues go. This was blatantly set up, but was fun with some really cool gadgetry. I'm definitely onboard for another issue to see where all of this leads. Special mention should go to the colourist. Who was obviously having a bit of a 1960's acid trip.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Non-Stop Spider-Man (2021) #1

Mar 18, 2021

I'm intrigued enough to follow this story arc through and see what happens. And it better continue to be Non-Stop.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Non-Stop Spider-Man (2021) #2

Apr 10, 2021

The introduction of the Zapata Brothers is done brilliantly. I loved the giant monster truck that they arrived in as well as the subsequent banter that they share with Spider-Man while they are battling.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Non-Stop Spider-Man (2021) #3

Jun 7, 2021

Overall. A fantastic story, which has a real sense of danger and urgency to it. And the way in which Zemo is introduced at the close of this issue is nicely timed. I can't wait to read the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Non-Stop Spider-Man (2021) #4

Sep 5, 2021

A really good story, which has room in it for Miles Moralis to come in should Joe Kelly wish to do that. I mean sure. While it is great to see Spidery standing up against a racist white supremacist. It would be even better for the sake of representation to actually bring in Miles Moralis who actually has some skin in the game so to speak. Whatever happens next. I am pretty sure that Spidey is in for an epic fight.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Non-Stop Spider-Man (2021) #5

Oct 5, 2021

OverallJoe Kelly produces a wonderful plot twist in this issue that will have fans talking for weeks. Overall. This is a really strong issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Obey Me #0

Mar 11, 2019

Also fun is how Monty starts off with not a great deal of belief in Vanessa and thinks he can get away with doing what he wants.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Obey Me #1

Apr 2, 2019

I look forward to the next issue, which I hope will give us a bit more of a story arc as opposed to the one-shot style we have seen thus far.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Obey Me #2

May 3, 2019

Overall. A fantastic issue, which successfully builds on character development and a new storyline.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Obey Me #3

Jun 4, 2019

I'm really enjoying how Monty is kind of acting as a mentor figure for Vanessa.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Obey Me #4

Jul 3, 2019

Overall. A great issue with a cliffhanger that will keep readers on the edge of their seats for an entire month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Obey Me #5

Aug 7, 2019

A really strong issue that delivers, drama, gore and fun one-liners in equal measure.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Oliver #1

Jan 25, 2019

This is a really interesting take on a classic Dickens character and I'm looking forward to where the story will go from here. So much so that I hit the subscribe button on my Comixology account.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Oliver #2

Feb 28, 2019

The issue leaves us with a few questions. Questions like will Oliver look for his mother now that he knows she is still alive? Or is he going to be the trigger of a revolution to change the stars of his IVC family?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Oliver #3

Apr 18, 2019

I can't wait to see what happens once Oliver goes to London.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Oliver #4

Nov 9, 2019

This issue for me doesn't really conclude the story. It's left open at the end, which can only mean that Image is hoping for Whitta to continue it at some stage or it is going to be left as is. If it's the latter. I will be rather pissed off because despite my lateness with this review. I was waiting for nearly 5 months for this final issue, so feel a bit underwhelmed by the ending. For sure Prospero's fate was very sad and well handled. But I would really like to have seen Oliver making his way to London. Meeting Fagan, Bill Sykes, Dodger and many of the other Dickens characters, but with Gary Whitta's take on them.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Oz: Fall of the Emerald City (2024) #1

Apr 23, 2024

Overall. This is a strong first issue and it will be interesting to see how the Wizard, Dorothy, and the rest will solve many of the problems that Oz and its surrounding settlements are having.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Oz: Fall of the Emerald City (2024) #2

May 21, 2024

The ArtworkThe art team do a great job on this issue. I loved the character drawing of polychrome and the god-like shimmer that they enveloped her in. Also great was the attack of the undead wizards as well as Dorothy's journey through the rainbow towards the close of the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Oz: Fall of the Emerald City (2024) #3

Jun 25, 2024

Fall of the Emerald City was a really strong story with some great character moments. I've enjoyed Zenescope's take on these classic characters and love the fact that Toto is a much bigger dog than the Toto that many of us know from the 1939 movie adaptation of The Wizard Of Oz.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Oz: Kingdom of The Lost (2023) #1

Aug 7, 2023

Oz Kingdom Of the Lost works as a great jump-on point for anyone wanting to read Zenescope's take on The Wizard of Oz and it will not take too long for readers to get to grips with the modernized versions of the characters. In this comic book universe of Oz. Dorothy has been on OZ for quite some time and has also been its Queen at one point. Now she works as a guardian for Oz and the Emerald City and continues to have close friendships with Scarecrow, The Lion, and of course her Wolf Toto.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Oz: Kingdom of The Lost (2023) #2

Oct 22, 2023

Oz: Kingdom of the Lost continues to be a fun and interesting take on the classic L. Frank Baumcharacters and the world that they inhabit.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Oz: Kingdom of The Lost (2023) #3

Feb 10, 2024

OverallAs a kid growing up. The Wizard of Oz was a favorite book and so were the films. This comic book series does a brilliant job of updating the worlds and characters that we meet in Oz. Dorothy is every bit the hero in these books, but equally so are Scarecrow, the Lion, and her other friends. Zenescope does a great job of continuing the journey of these characters. Added to all this are some brilliant new characters that Zenescope has created in order to expand the world of Oz.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Peter Cannon: Thunderbolt (2019) #1

Jan 28, 2019

I enjoyed the meeting of the various characters at the beginning, but do not feel I know enough about these characters as yet to be able to care for them as I do for other comic book heroes. Hopefully, this will be addressed in the second issue because I think there is some potential there. In a small way, the other characters put me in mind of the various characters that have worked with Doc Savage over the years, but they need a bit more fleshing out in order to make me care.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Peter Cannon: Thunderbolt (2019) #2

Feb 26, 2019

Kieron Gillen's story continues to spin its wheels with a lot of technobabble based in physics and some philosophical questions to ponder, but unfortunately, the overload of dialogue is slowing down pacing to a point where the book is more of a chore to read than it is fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Prodigy (2018) #2

Jan 8, 2019

Mark Millar has once again come up with a fun and modern comic book character that we can all get behind and relate to on some level. I'm looking forward to spending more time with Edison Crane in the months to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Prodigy (2018) #3

Feb 5, 2019

Overall. I'm really liking where this is going and hoping to learn a little more about The Brotherhood of The Dragan in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Prodigy (2018) #4

Mar 12, 2019

Some stunning visuals from the artist and a lot of really witty dialogue from Mark Millar make this comic book series a must for fans everywhere. I'll definitely be treating myself to the trade paperback when it gets released. I love this kind of story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Prodigy (2018) #5

Apr 9, 2019

The best issue to date, which a cliffhanger that will leave readers aghast with shock.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Prodigy (2018) #6

Jun 11, 2019

Overall. I've really enjoyed this series of comics. It's been a highlight of my comics reading list for the last six months and I will definitely be treating myself to the trade paperback collecting all six issues when it comes out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Project: Superpowers (2018) #1

Aug 1, 2018

This is a really strong first issue and has got me interested enough to actually go back and try and get the previous issues so I can read volume one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Project: Superpowers (2018) #2

Sep 3, 2018

If you are a lover of pulp storytelling. This is a must-have series to follow.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Project: Superpowers (2018) #3

Oct 9, 2018

A brilliant issue, which has me so hyped for what is to come next month. I sense things are going to get really bad for our heroes before they'llget better.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Project: Superpowers (2018) #4

Nov 20, 2018

There are some really fun character beats in this issue, but most enjoyable is the way Pandora is speaking like the classic Bond villain.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Project: Superpowers (2018) #5

Jan 1, 2019

OverallAn absolutely fantastic penultimate issue, which pretty much sets things up for what will have to be one hell of a final issue that we'll get to read next month. I for one can't wait. I want it NOW!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Project: Superpowers (2018) #6

Feb 5, 2019

I loved how the issue was bookended in the same way that it began. With Masqueradegiving an interview to the press, but this time with a more hopeful tone.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Rebel Moon: House of the Blood Axe (2024) #1

Jan 16, 2024

Overall there are a lot of moving parts to this first issue with a few flashbacks. I'm intrigued enough to continue reading for a while, but could grow tired of the politics involved if something does not happen in the next two issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Rebel Moon: House of the Blood Axe (2024) #2

Feb 21, 2024

This second issue of Rebel Moon: House of Bloodaxe continues to do a fairly solid job of revealing the complex politics that led to the destruction of Shasu and the absolute rise to power of Motherworld.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Rebel Moon: House of the Blood Axe (2024) #3

Mar 26, 2024

Overall a great issue that moves the story on a little and pretty much shows us the beginning of the end of the House of Bloodaxe's rule on the Planet of Shasu.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Rebel Moon: House of the Blood Axe (2024) #4

May 29, 2024

Overall a really strong ending to a great prequel story for the Rebel Moon franchise as a whole.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Red Sonja (2017): Holiday Special #1

Dec 12, 2018

This is a fun book for the holiday's, but nothing really much beyond that. The first story is perhaps the most Christmas like. While the second is more of a morality tale.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Red Sonja/Tarzan #1

May 1, 2018

Overall. This is a great first issue that has me very much invested enough to join Tarzan and Red Sonja when they journey to Cameroon for the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Red Sonja/Tarzan #2

Jun 5, 2018

Overall. This is a great second issue, which advances the story without giving too much away as to how the two heroes will eventually triumph. I can't wait to read issue 3 when it comes out next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Red Sonja/Tarzan #3

Jul 3, 2018

Overall. This is a great issue, which adds to the story and gives a few clues into how Dull is managing to traverse through time. We also have a really nice moment between Tarzan and Sonja, which is worth the price of admission alone.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Red Sonja/Tarzan #4

Aug 20, 2018

OverallOverall. This is another fantastic issue that ends in such a way that you'll be stamping your feet in absolute frustration to find out what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Red Sonja/Tarzan #5

Oct 16, 2018

I also loved the artwork in this issue and thought the final few pages were absolutely jaw-dropping. In fact, it is a shame that we'll only have the one issue left to explore these new vistas.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Red Sonja/Tarzan #6

Dec 11, 2018

In conclusion. I've enjoyed this series so much that I think further adventures pairing Tarzan and Sonja would, for the most part, be welcomed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Red Sonja: The Long Walk To Oblivion #1

May 3, 2017

This solid art combined with some really nice colour work make for a really good introduction to Red Sonja for any newbies wanting to jump on, but be warned. The story ends with a cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Rivers of London: The Fey and the Furious #1

Nov 6, 2019

I suspect this is supposed to be some kind of spell casting prior to the race. But it was pretty cool nonetheless to see such a fun reference.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Savage Avengers (2022) #1

May 18, 2022

Overall, this is a great jumping-on-point for Savage Avengers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Sea of Thieves #1

Mar 19, 2018

Sea Of Thieves #1 is out now and its well worth a look if you are looking for a fun adventure on the high seas.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Seven Swords #1

Jun 22, 2021

Overall ‘Seven Swords' gets off to a solid start.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Seven Swords #2

Aug 9, 2021

Overall. So far this book is delivering on its initial promise of an epic swashbuckling adventure. I can't wait for issue 3.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Seven Swords #3

Aug 30, 2021

Overall. A fantastic issue that introduces Captain Blood and The Man in The Iron Mask. I can't wait to read the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Seven Swords #4

Oct 11, 2021

This for me is the best issue of the run thus far. I look forward to seeing how things play out in next month's chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Seven Swords #5

Jan 31, 2022

OverallA thrilling end to what has been a fantastic story. I'm actually really sad that it had to end because reading about these classic characters working together or at least trying to has been a thrill. I really hope that Evan Daugherty comes up with another adventure for this group of characters at some point in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Shadecraft #1

Apr 3, 2021

OverallI love how writer Joe Henderson has taken something that we all take for granted. Like our own shadows and turned it into something scary. Granted it is a trope that is used a lot in horror. But whether it is good or not always depends on the execution. And it is executed brilliantly in this story. And we get a very clever twist at the end of the book too.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Shadecraft #2

May 3, 2021

OverallJoe Henderson has come up with a neat story idea for this book, which I continue to enjoy. I love the idea of a person's shadow being able to separate from them when they are in a coma. And also love the mystery surrounding why it has happened and how that will most likely tie into the shadows that have been attacking Zadie.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Shadecraft #3

May 30, 2021

Overall. A really solid third issue, which really moves the story along and ends with somewhat of a cruel twist.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Shadecraft #4

Jun 29, 2021

OverallA fantastic penultimate issue, which raises the personal stakes for Zadie and her mum as they work together to get Ricky's Shadow back. It will be interesting to see how this all pans out in the final issue, which drops next month. I'll be particularly interested in finding out if Zadie and her mother are able to reunite Ricky's shadow with his comatose body. That is of course assuming that his body is in the same complex.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Shadecraft #5

Jul 25, 2021

If we don't see this made into a TV series or a movie in the future. I'll be very surprised.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Shang-Chi (2020) #1

Oct 6, 2020

This opening issue does a brilliant job of setting the mood for what is a basic Kung Fu revenge story. To be honest. I am not familiar with the character of Shang-Chi. So this comic is my introduction to him and most likely an introduction for other newcomers too. Writer Gene Luen Yang does a brilliant job of introducing the characters and the world, and the art team does some fantastic vistas and wonderful martial arts-style fight sequences.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Shang-Chi (2020) #3

Nov 30, 2020

This book continues to entertain with his well-drawn characters and solid martial arts style story. I now wait with anticipation for issue 4, which will conclude this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Shang-Chi (2020) #4

Jan 6, 2021

I have really enjoyed how writer Gene Luen Yang has mixed the martial arts action with mythology. And as someone that lives in the UK that is relatively uneducated about what the British did in regards to selling Opium to China as a means of trying to pacify and take control of the country. The way the writer ties all of that into the backstory for this book is brilliantly executed. It's a real high point for the book.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Shang-Chi (2020) #5

Jan 31, 2021

Hopefully, this mini-series, which is pretty much the new origin story for this character will lead to newer stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Shang-Chi (2021) #1

Jul 11, 2021

Overall. A great start and a marvel of a story in which we get to see Spider-Man and Shang Chi work together on a job.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Shang-Chi (2021) #4

Sep 11, 2021

Gene Luen Yang continues to have a lot of fun by having Shang-Chi and his family meet up with other members of the Marvel Universe. Only this time out it is kind of family meeting family. As Shang-Chi's Five Weapons Society meets up with Marvel's first family. The Fantastic Four. We get a nice handoff and connection to the next issue at the close where Reed Richards places a call to Captain America. So, next month Shang-Chi will seemingly meet Iron Man as a result of this phone call. I look forward to seeing how all that pans out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Shang-Chi (2021) #5

Oct 17, 2021

I can't wait to see where all this goes in the next issue. Which will see Shang-Chi go up against Thor.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Shang-Chi (2021) #6

Nov 23, 2021

OverallA really strong issue in which Shang Chi continues to try and convert his family into a more honorable way of doing things. Yet it looks like he is going to be in for some real trials in the next issue if the cliffhanger is anything to go by.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Shang-Chi (2021) #7

Jan 10, 2022

Overall. A really cool issue, which introduces a few new threats to the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Shang-Chi (2021) #8

Feb 8, 2022

OverallA fantastic issue to close out the story arc on. The backstory is handled fantastically by Gene Luen Yang who has done a great job of building this world over the last seven issues. The next arc is already set up and ready to go. And I for one can't wait to read it. Hopefully, we get a little more Chinese mysticism thrown into the pot as that is an aspect of this comic that I have truly enjoyed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Sharkey The Bounty Hunter #1

Feb 19, 2019

Overall. ‘Sharkey The Bounty Hunter' looks like it could well be another hit for Mark Millar and will make for a wonderfully fun television show. Hopefully, Netflix keeps all the humor and fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Sharkey The Bounty Hunter #2

Mar 26, 2019

This issue ends on a cliffhanger. Which pretty much guarantees that readers are going to want to come back for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Sharkey The Bounty Hunter #4

Jun 4, 2019

This was another great issue, which left a few characters in a standoff toward the close of the issue. I loved the whole Government conspiracy plot, which is likely to make Sharkey into more of a reluctant anti-hero as the story progresses. I can almost hear the voice of actor Paul Darrow from Blake's 7 for some weird reason.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Sharkey The Bounty Hunter #5

Aug 12, 2019

Overall. A fabulous issue, which sets things up wonderfully for next months finale.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Sharkey The Bounty Hunter #6

Oct 22, 2019

So. Did this final issue deliver? Hell yeah… and then some.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #0

Jul 25, 2017

Looking forward to issue one in September, but for now. This is a great start.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #1

Sep 8, 2017

My only criticism of the story is the pacing. We seemed to spend a lot of time with the soldiers explaining why they were in the jungle and so forth. Which is something that could have been done with fewer words. Aside from that. I rather enjoyed this issue and look forward to seeing how Sheena handles her first meeting with the surveyor.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #2

Oct 5, 2017

Either way. Given the cliffhanger ending that this issue offers up. It will be a race against time for Sheena and her friend to put a stop to Cadwell and return a sense of balance to the jungle.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #3

Nov 7, 2017

Overall. This is a strong third issue, which sets up things brilliantly for next month with a savage cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #4

Dec 5, 2017

Overall. This fourth issue delivers more on plot than character beats. The writers used a lot of character beats in the earlier issues to get us to care. Now they are delivering some real danger and situations in order to make us get behind these characters and feel the shock and awe while whooping at their every victory.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #5

Jan 10, 2018

Overall. This was a great issue, which wrapped up what has been a fantastically fun story, which gave us a supernatural tale in which Sheena is forced to battle monsters due to the interference of outsiders. Thankfully there will be a new story arc starting up next month, which promises to be just as fun and exciting as this one has been. Hopefully, it will be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #6

Feb 15, 2018

The reveal on the final page, which introduces us to Huntress is worth the price of admission alone. I look forward to issue two.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #7

Mar 26, 2018

Overall. This was another solid issue with some awesome story beats and great artwork. I can't wait for the next issue to see what it all goes. Plus I'd love for us to be able to get to know Sheena's Grandmother a little more. She makes a big impression on this issue and hopefully will stick around for awhile in forthcoming issues. We get left with an excellent cliffhanger, which could well potentially be history repeating itself.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #8

Apr 23, 2018

Overall. This is a fantastic issue that sees the story moved forward, the issue starts off with a nice flashback to Sheena's early childhood. Hopefully, we get to see Sheena's mother return in the next issue. Issue seven was a really great issue in which mother and daughter reconnected and it be nice to see that paid off a bit more.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #9

May 30, 2018

Overall. This issue builds at a rapid pace and is obviously drawing this chapter of the story to its natural end, which we'll likely see in the next issue. All that said. I somehow think Sheena will most likely have a few more encounters with Caldwell Industries in the months to come. They are proving to be a recurring threat.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Sheena: Queen of the Jungle (2017) #10

Jul 11, 2018

This was a fantastic issue, which saw a few confrontations as well as a couple of reveals. Writers Marguerite Bennett and Christina Trujillo continue to feed us enough clues about the story and plot to keep us interested while providing some nice dialogue between the various characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Sherlock Holmes (2023) #1

Sep 25, 2023

I found this 75-page origin story for Spencer Holmes to be really entertaining and think that they'd be better served calling the book Spencer Holmes as opposed to selling it as Sherlock as they move forward. The characters were fun and engaging and Spencer was very easy to like. Especially given the trauma that she experiences during this first adventure.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Sherlock Holmes: The Vanishing Man #1

May 2, 2018

Overall. This is a great first issue that has me wanting more. What happened to Michael Williams? Will Wiggins manage to get away from the chemist? Does Michael Williams disappearance have any connection to the archaeologicalfindings that Holmes read about? I guess we're all going to have to wait to next month to get some of these answers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Sherlock Holmes: The Vanishing Man #2

Jun 6, 2018

Overall. This second issue does enough to keep you interested by teasing little hints and clues that will no doubt be explained as the mystery comes to its conclusion.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Sherlock Holmes: The Vanishing Man #3

Jul 18, 2018

This is a solid issue, which gives us a few more questions to ponder.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Sherlock Holmes: The Vanishing Man #4

Aug 14, 2018

Hopefully, we'll see more Sherlock Holmes from Dynamite in the not too distant future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Skybourne #1

Sep 9, 2016

All this said. I'm hooked in enough to want to read the next issue to see where all this is going to go.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Skybourne #2

Oct 29, 2016

I particularly enjoyed the banter between Swiggy and Thomas at the start of the issue and I love that this world has pre cogs and psychics and such. Love the use of mythology in this book and the fact that Merlin is portrayed as more of a villain.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Skybourne #3

Jan 30, 2017

I look forward to the next issue to see where things will go.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Skybourne #4

Jul 14, 2017

I now anxiously wait until the next issue and hope that it is not going to be to long of a wait.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Skybourne #5

Mar 8, 2018

Overall. This has been an enjoyable comic book. The only thing I did not particularly enjoy was the long wait between issues. But that said it did not take away from my enjoyment of reading them when they came out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Sons of Star Trek (2024) #2

May 6, 2024

I'm enjoying this book and can't wait to see where stuff goes in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Sons of Star Trek (2024) #3

Jun 11, 2024

Sons of Star Trek continues to be a good read and fully commits to its purpose of highlighting the strengths and skills of Jake Sisko, Alexander, and Nog. I loved how this issue was told from Nog's point of view via his logs and also enjoyed how Nog's experience in this universe has helped inform him on what he needs to do once he returns to his universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Sons of Star Trek (2024) #4

Jul 9, 2024

In the process of their time served on the U.S.S. Chimera. Nog, Alexander, and Jake have learned some very valuable life lessons that they hope to carry forward with them when they get back home.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Space Bandits #1

Jul 1, 2019

I look forward to seeing how this story will unfold in the months to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Space Bandits #2

Aug 5, 2019

OverallThis second issue continues the story that was so wonderfully set up in the first issue. Mark Millar provides a hatful of fun dialogue and some of the exchanges between the main two character are already sounding very much like banter. I loved how he has Cody take Thena through her plan and the various stages of it. It felt a little like Oceans 11 meets Prison Break and Star Wars.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Space Bandits #3

Sep 4, 2019

I look forward to the next issue. If of course, I'm still alive to read it:)

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Space Bandits #4

Oct 1, 2019

OverallThis issue was worth the wait. I especially enjoyed the quieter moments where Cody and Thena get to do a little bonding, which sort of put me in mind of films such as Thelma and Louise. It is very apparent that seeds are being sewn for the final issue, which promises to be an absolute stonker if the final page cliffhanger is anything to go by. Like pretty much most readers. I can't wait to see how all of this will end, but also hope it will lead to some further adventures for these two strong female characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Space Bandits #5

Nov 5, 2019

OverallA fantastic way to close out the story. The final moments in which we see Thena and Cody kind of put me in a mind a little of the ending to ‘Trading Places'. This is another one that I will be looking to buy a physical copy of when it is released on trade. If it is out in time for Christmas. It is one I'd definitely add to the list.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Space Ghost (2024) #1

May 5, 2024

David Pepose gives us a wonderful origin story that reveals how Space Ghost first meets Jace, Jan and Blip and winds up being a guardian figure for them. However, this version of events is somewhat more edgier and updated for today's audiences. The death of Jace and Jens father at the start of the book is particularly jarring. In short, this first issue is all out action from beginning to end and I look forward to seeing what Pepose does next with these characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Space Ghost (2024) #2

Jun 10, 2024

David Pepose pulls off a storming second issue, which is only interrupted by a four-page preview of the new Johnny Quest comic, which comes out in August sandwiched between the prologue and main story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Space Ghost (2024) #3

Jul 8, 2024

David Pepose continues to capture the spirit and adventure of the old Space Ghost cartoon series while adding some nice modern touches to the characters. I loved the various exchanges of dialogue between Ghost and Widow when she was telling him her plan. But the best dialogue comes when we see Widow trying to tempt Jan into joining her.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Space Ghost (2024) #4

Aug 12, 2024

I can't wait to see how the rest of this story plays out when the next issue drops. Great job.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Space Ghost (2024) #5

Sep 17, 2024

David Pepose continues his Space Ghost story with some wonderful action beats and fun dialogue exchanges between Space Ghost and Zorak who is quite frankly a few cards short of a full deck.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Space Ghost (2024) #6

Oct 14, 2024

Overall a brilliant book that continues to respect the source material while modernizing it so that it doesn't change the things that make it what it is.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Space Ghost (2024) #7

Nov 18, 2024

While Space Ghost and Jan have their moments, the true standouts are Jace and Blip, who really carry the heart of this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Space Ghost (2024) #8

Dec 14, 2024

With Space Ghost gone, Jace and Jan try to uncover what happened to him. They come across an old robot head floating in space, which Jace decides to activate. The head not only connects to Metallus but also streams a live feed of Metallus's battle with Space Ghost. As they watch the fight unfold, the kids are given a chilling account of Metallus's dark and destructive past.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Trek (2022) #1

Nov 2, 2022

I'm looking forward to seeing how this story plays out over the next few issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek (2022) #2

Dec 6, 2022

The writers also managed to give us a brilliant cliffhanger ending that is going to keep us perched on the edge of our seats for the whole month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek (2022) #3

Jan 23, 2023

The writing team made clever use of Q for this story and reuniting Q with Sisko was fun to see given that the characters have only encountered each other once and the DS9 series. The book leaves off with a fun tease for the next issue in which I think we will see Sisko visit a planet of Gods, hmm, I wonder if he will get to ask these gods if they need the use of his Starship. I'm pretty sure Scotty will have a word or two to say about that. All in all this story feels like a Star Trek story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Trek (2022) #6

Apr 15, 2023

This issue does a fairly decent job of continuing this outlandish and metaphysical story in which Sisko gets to go where absolutely no one has gone before as he talks a God down from wiping out the Earth. Added to this we get a nice reference to the first issue of Star Trek: Defiant as Sisko looks to recruit someone to take over from Worf as his second in command. For now the story pauses as the Theseus returns home to DS9. But the hunt to capture Kahless will most likely continue in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek (2022) #7

Apr 29, 2023

The ArtworkThe artwork throughout this book is fairly solid but is a bit hit-and-miss with some of the character likenesses. Specifically when it comes to Sisko's wife. That said the drawings of the various locations such as Quarks Bar are fairly strong. By far the strongest art is when we see a fleet of Dominion War-era Cardassian Ships go up against Sisko.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Star Trek (2022) #8

May 23, 2023

At a certain point in this story. We get a nice homage paid to the Deep Space Nine TV show as we see Jake Sisko recall the adventure he had with his dad when they navigated space in a Bajorian Sail Barge. The art for this segment, which sees Theseus kitted out with Bajoran Sales is brilliant to look at. It also made me smile seeing Tom Paris's big goofy grin while using an old ship's steering wheel to steer the ship.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Trek (2022) #9

Jun 20, 2023

OverallThis was a solid issue that features some great new Star Trek moments for us to enjoy. I particularly liked seeing Gul Dukat make a return. Even in his Pah Wraith Spirit form. The issue also ends on a brilliant cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Star Trek (2022) #10

Jul 15, 2023

This issue wraps up the trial of Benjamin Sisko rather too quickly for my taste as I felt it was all a little too rushed. However, the mission brief of this issue was obviously to get the story arc concluded in order to start the ongoing Star Trek comic to link up with the DAY OF BLOOD storyline that has just begun in Star Trek: Defiant. This mission is absolutely accomplished with some thrilling final pages.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek (2022) #11

Aug 29, 2023

This is a great issue that builds nicely on all of the character arcs that have been developing throughout all of the books that are involved in the crossover.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek (2022) #12

Sep 30, 2023

Collin Kelly does a solid job of finishing this story but leaves a few plot threads hanging to get picked up in future issues. I loved how the issue ended with Lore looking to take advantage of the power vacuum that Kahless had left behind. But I also loved the clever way in which the writer uses Sela and makes her a relevant character again.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek (2022) #13

Nov 1, 2023

This is a fun issue that gives us our first look at the Tzenkethi who were often mentioned on the series, but never really seen.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek (2022) #14

Nov 26, 2023

To sum up. I'm really enjoying this story so far and look forward to seeing how it evolves over the next few months.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek (2022) #15

Dec 29, 2023

I also loved the interplay between Dr. Crusher and Scotty and how Scotty writes about it in his log.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Trek (2022) #16

Jan 23, 2024

A really strong issue that adds a little more jeopardy to the storyline, but also allows for some character growth for Ensign Sato, who is the Andorian Great Grand Daughter of Enterprise NX-01's Hoshi Sato.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek (2022) #17

Feb 29, 2024

A great story arc that's truly testing Captain Sisko's abilities as one of Starfleet's most capable officers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Trek (2022) #18

Mar 24, 2024

Overall this story has been one of those stories that reminds you why you love Star Trek so much. The conflict between the Tzenkethi and Sisko's orders and the eventual resolution of conflict and how it is achieved is very Star Trek.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek (2022) #19

Apr 22, 2024

An interesting first chapter that presents a few interesting character arcs and wow what a cliffhanger this book ends on.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek (2022) #20

May 20, 2024

My favorite panels come towards the end of the book when Theseus enters Pleroma we see some fun imagery of the various crew members as they are breaking through the barrier.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek (2022) #21

Jun 24, 2024

Another solid issue with a great cliffhanger ending that will keep readers on the edge of their seats until the next book is released. Will Beverly find her son Wesley and what will become of the Sisko? I can't wait to find out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Trek (2022) #22

Jul 22, 2024

The StorySisko's conversation with the Gods at Pleroma gets interrupted by the Wormhole prophet who appears as his mother. The prophets want Sisko to return home as the view his actions with regards to the gods and the recent conflict between Kahless and the gods to be destructive. The prophet tries to illustrate their point to Captain Sisko but is not getting through to him. Meanwhile, Beverly Crusher manages to get to Wesley's office and enjoys a bit of a reunion with him, but is shocked when she sees how much he has aged. Elsewhere, Lily Sato acting on orders from Section 31 is about to sabotage the Pleroma.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek (2022) #23

Aug 28, 2024

Overall. A solid issue that has a wicked cliffhanger that will keep us all guessing until next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek (2022) #24

Sep 30, 2024

Collin Kelly and Jackson Lanzing have written a stunning story here, but mixing science fiction with concepts such as gods and spirits is always going to be a wild and wacky ride. And given how much trouble that Sisko and the Theseus crew seem to be in. I look forward to seeing how they manage to get out of this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Trek (2022) #25

Oct 22, 2024

Collin Kelly and Jackson Lanzing get off to a brilliant start with this new story arc. Starting the storyline with a bit of a battle against Species 8472 and then revealing that the crew has travelled to an alternate universe and time is a pretty big way to start the story. Bigger still is the fact that a group of people from the Prime timeline now find themselves in the Kelvin Timeline. I look forward to seeing where this story goes as in will be interesting to see how Sisko and his crew will interact with Kirk and his crew.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek (2022) #26

Nov 24, 2024

This was a fun issue that struck a nice balance between lighter moments and the darker backdrop of Lore's weapon and its looming effects. I particularly enjoyed the scene where the older version of Scotty has a conversation with the younger Simon Pegg version of Scotty, discussing their engineering theories and accomplishments. It was a great bit of fan service, and I especially loved it because Scotty has always been my favorite character from the original series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Star Trek (2022) Annual: 2023

Jun 4, 2023

If you are a fan of Star Trek. Even only a casual fan. I highly recommend that you read this Annual.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek (2022) Annual: 2024

Jul 23, 2024

Collin Kelly and Jackson Lanzing do a great job of capturing the voices of these well-known Star Trek characters. As a fan of TNG and DS9, I was thrilled to see Chief O'Brien get a bit of a role in this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Trek One-Shots (2022) #400

Sep 11, 2022

This final 400th issue packs in a fair bit of content and gives us some really cool new stories from the final frontier. It's also a wonderful celebration of Star Trek comics in general and well worth the money. I look forward to the new series of Star Trek comics from IDW, which will launch in October.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Star Trek: Boldly Go #1

Oct 20, 2016

The writing by Mike Johnson is pretty confident and he seems to have the voices of the characters down pretty well. The art byGeorge Caltsoldas and Tony Shasteenworks well in servicing the story. I loved the visual of Uhura in full Vulcan dress.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Star Trek: Boldly Go #3

Dec 16, 2016

We are left with an exciting Cliffhanger, which again borrows from ‘Best Of Both Worlds', but instead of Picard. It is Spock who will be borgified. Will Kirk have the gumption to fire on his best friend?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Trek: Boldly Go #4

Jan 20, 2017

As you recall. I initially complained about this being kind of a clone of ‘Best Of Both Worlds', which it was. But I am happy to say that this final issue kind of changed the story significantly enough for it to be able to stand on its own. Especially given how Spock was used in the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Boldly Go #5

Feb 28, 2017

I have to admit. I was late to reading and reviewing this issue because of a lot of real life stuff getting in the way, but am glad I found the time because this issue deserves a look. Especially if you are fan that wants to learn some of Jaylah's backstory.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Star Trek: Boldly Go #6

Apr 5, 2017

In fact the final page of the story sees the Tal Shiar looking to recruit her, which could make for an interesting side story. I'm kind of hoping she joins.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Star Trek: Boldly Go #7

Apr 18, 2017

Overall this is a promising start to a new arc, which has some likeable characters in the new cadets.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Trek: Day of Blood (2023): Shaxs' Best Day

Oct 4, 2023

OverallStar Trek: Day of BloodShaxs' Best Day is one hell of a good time. The jokes are thick and fast and it's rather fun seeing what a good day looks like for the legendary Lt Junior Grade Shax. I look forward to any sequels. If there is one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Day of Blood (2023) #1

Jul 24, 2023

This book looks like it could be the start of an epic story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Trek: Deep Space Nine - The Dog of War #1

Apr 9, 2023

The story concerning the Borg technology was the dominant thread in this book. This makes me wonder if the Dog is going to be used in some way for the Federation's fight with the Dominion.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Trek: Deep Space Nine - The Dog of War #2

May 9, 2023

This is a really strong second issue in which we see the crew's relationships grow with Lattie, but also see some really good progress with the overall story. I'm looking forward to seeing where the third issue will go with all of this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Deep Space Nine - The Dog of War #3

Jun 12, 2023

Mike Chen continues to spin us a fun Star Trek story, which combines the cuteness of Latty and his relationship with the crew with the Broker's plans to steal information from the station while using the dog as a diversion.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Deep Space Nine - The Dog of War #4

Jul 11, 2023

A fantastic issue in which we finally get to see a few action beats as the crew set about rescuing Latty and taking back the Borg technology. In terms of art, there is lots going on from the planning of the rescue through to its execution. I loved the sequence with Dax using gymnastics to recover the Borg thing. But also quite enjoyed the sequence where the crew were navigating through the ship's air vents in order to find their targets.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Deep Space Nine - The Dog of War #5

Aug 8, 2023

This series was a great mix of action, espionage, and cuteness.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Trek: Deep Space Nine - Too Long a Sacrifice #1

Jul 18, 2020

A solid start, which has me gagging to get the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Trek: Deep Space Nine - Too Long a Sacrifice #2

Aug 21, 2020

Either way. It will be intriguing to see where David and Scott Tipton will take this story in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek: Deep Space Nine - Too Long a Sacrifice #4

Nov 18, 2020

I'd really like to see more Star Trek: Deep Space Nine comics and hope that this series gets enough in sales to encourage IDW to print more. Overall. A solid conclusion to what has been a fantastic story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #1

Mar 20, 2023

The description of this book being the Dirty Dozen meets Star Trek is pretty much bang on. And I can't wait to see how this ongoing story arc will further link up with that of the ongoing arc in the main Star Trek comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #2

Apr 17, 2023

Overall. There is a lot of fun to be had with these characters and I'm really enjoying the story so far. Especially given how delicate Worf's crew seems to be. I look forward to seeing how things pan out in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #3

May 17, 2023

OverallThis was a really strong issue with lots going on. Added to Spock struggling to keep The Defiant flying. We has Worf and his team escaping as well as the Orian Captain narrating an old Orian story about a past Orian leader and a pact that was made with a Gorn Captain. And if that isn't enough we get another report about Worf and Spock from Romulan Agent Sela. The question is. When will we see Sela actually come into this story and what role will she have?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #5

Jul 9, 2023

OverallThis is a solid issue that builds up to the Day of Blood storyline, which launched last month. I look forward to seeing how this issue and the prelude issue connect with the ongoing Star Trek series. Especially given that Worf contacts Sisko at the close of this issue to ask for help.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #6

Aug 9, 2023

Christopher Cantwell does a solid job of moving the story along while continuing to develop the various character arcs that have permeated the story thus far. The conflict between Sisko and Worf is particularly interesting and works well as we had hints of it during the TV series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #7

Sep 12, 2023

Overall. This continues to be an enjoyable story and is one that I'd have loved to have seen on the TV as an actual episode because Cantwell uses the characters so well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #8

Oct 10, 2023

Christopher Cantwell really turns the screw in this issue by delivering an interesting plot twist by having Starfleet make Worf and his crewmates resign their Starfleet Commissions for some off-book missions. Their first target is Hugh the Borg who has been causing all sorts of problems for what is left of the Borg collective. But it is the two other targets that could prove to be quite intriguing.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #9

Nov 13, 2023

Overall. I'm continuing to enjoy this book about some of Star Trek's most complex characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #10

Dec 26, 2023

This was a fun issue that delves back into the world that we first saw portrayed in the Star Trek Pilot The Cage. But adding more spice to the story is the audaciousness of Berlinghoff Rasmussen's plan to steal a Talosian and use it to profit from its powerful psychic powers. I loved the dialogue between Spock and The Keeper towards the close of the issue. And I enjoyed Worf's ultimate answer to the moral dilemma he is faced with when it comes to the fate of The Keeper and the Talosians. Indeed the way this story ends leaves us with some interesting possibilities for future stories with The Talosians if other writers are game to take it on.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #11

Feb 12, 2024

Christopher Cantwell has done a great job with this story arc. Bringing together a ragtag crew of people who have had issues with Starfleet and having Worf lead them was a genius idea. Moreover having them challenged by the moral ethics of the mission that Starfleet gives them has also shown that even those that have butted heads with Starfleet's directives have certain lines that they will not cross.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #12

Mar 4, 2024

Christopher Cantwell brings us a fun story, which looks like it might be a worthy sequel to the first season of Star Trek: The Next Generation episode 'Conspiracy' in which we saw top-level Starfleet personnel taken over by a parasitical alien that was looking to take over The Federation.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #13

Mar 30, 2024

A strong second chapter to this story arc that reintroduced the parasitic bugs from the first season TNG episode Conspiracy. The flashback with Nymira might suggest that she has prior experience with these parasites. We also get a nice little twist that involves a key crewmember from the defiant.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #14

Apr 28, 2024

Christopher Cantwell continues to make clever use of the parasitic aliens that Star Trek fans first met in the first season TNG episode 'Conspiracy'. I've enjoyed how similar these parasites are to the Borg in terms of them needing a humanoid host to push their agenda forward. It will be interesting to see how Hugh's simulation of B'Elanna plays out in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #15

May 27, 2024

Meanwhile, Nymira is still struggling with her past demons and is self-medicating to try and forget. When Sela arrives on the scene to help Worf and his crew. Nymira uses it as an opportunity to escape for some alone time.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #16

Jul 1, 2024

Christopher Cantwell does a brilliant job of wrapping up this third-story arc. The work he did on developing Nymira's character arc really pays off in this issue and she is a character that I won't likely forget for some time. I also enjoyed how Hugh's story arc gets concluded in this story, but hope that we see him pop up again in future Star Trek comics because he is a truly fantastic character with lots to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #17

Jul 29, 2024

A really interesting story that might marry up with events that we can assume took place post Star Trek: Nemesis. I really enjoyed the inclusion of Miles O'Brien in this story and how he has been used as a point of contact in Federation space for Worf and his crew.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #18

Sep 3, 2024

The best part of this story for me is the inclusion of Chief O'Brien who was always a favorite character of mine from DS9.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #19

Sep 28, 2024

The StoryWhile Miles O'Brien's rescue attempt of his old friend Worf gets interrupted by Dr. Julian Bashire who is acting on behalf of Section 31, things on Antara are escalating as Worf readies the locals for the fight of their lives. Elsewhere on the planet Ro and B'Elanna make repairs on some ancient attack ships in which they hope to use in their defense of Antara. Meanwhile, Revo is getting more suspicious about his Daughter Sela and has assigned two of his best to follow her. Meanwhile, Spock has learned that the Romulan Star System is living on borrowed time.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #20

Oct 26, 2024

OverallAnother solid issue that builds brilliantly on the what was set up in previous issues. I've enjoyed seeing the nuances of conflict between Worf and Maiek. I also enjoyed the beginning of the book where we see some flashbacks to the battle of Setlik III as O'Brien makes a confession to his friend Julian Bashir.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) #21

Dec 2, 2024

This story arc feels like it could have been a brilliant TV series or filmits blend of deep philosophical themes and character-driven storytelling would translate beautifully to the screen.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Defiant (2023) Annual #1

Jan 30, 2024

Christopher Cantwell brings us a fun story involving Sela that we would never have gotten without her character having been brought back into the comics. Sela is a much-loved character from Star Trek: The Next Generation that premiered in the two-part Unification story, which saw Picard and Data work with Spock to try and bring reunification between Romulons and Vulcans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Star Trek: Discovery #1

Nov 30, 2017

Overall. A fairly confident first issue. Not sure if am hooked though.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Trek: Discovery #2

Jan 26, 2018

The artwork from Tony Shasteen is pretty consistentthroughout the comic. We even have a few of the Klingons on Boreth sporting facial hair in the same style that you'd expect to see on Star Trek: The Next Generation. Whether this is something that we'll eventually see on the actual TV series remains to be seen. But it was good to see a few Klingon's with facial hair again.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Star Trek: Discovery - Adventures In the 32nd Century #1

Mar 8, 2022

A really fun issue, which cat lovers will enjoy everywhere.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Discovery - Adventures In the 32nd Century #3

May 15, 2022

This was a great deal of fun to read with some fantastic artwork. Hopefully, next month's final issue in this series of one-shots is as good.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Discovery - Adventures In the 32nd Century #4

Jun 13, 2022

This final issue of Adventures in the 32nd Century gets a thumbs up.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Trek: Discovery - Aftermath #1

Nov 10, 2019

OverallThis is a pretty strong first issue and I feel really compelled to get to work on reviewing issue 2, which I hope to put up tomorrow. Kirsten Beyer who was also a writer on the TV show has done a pretty good job of tying things into the continuity of the classic series without taking anything away from the Star Trek: Discovery characters. L'Rell is well written and it is obvious that she is going to be walking a fine line during the peace treaty. I also love the fact that she has involved a young commander Kor as her personal security. Something about keeping friends close and your enemies closer.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Trek: Discovery - Aftermath #2

Nov 10, 2019

Overall. A fairly good issue with a fantastic cliffhanger ending. I look forward to the next issue, which I hope will come later in the month. Kapla.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Star Trek: Discovery - Aftermath #3

Nov 22, 2019

Despite those issues though. This was well worth a read and a solid continuation from where the second season of ‘Star Trek: Discovery' left off.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Trek: Holo-Ween #1

Oct 6, 2023

Holo-Ween gets off to a really strong start with a story that immediately grips you and has you wondering what is going to happen from one page to the next. Christopher Sequeira's idea to resurrect Redjac as the villain for this book is a good one as he is an enemy that can be horrific and fun in equal measure and his ties to Jack the Ripper only add to the fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Holo-Ween #2

Oct 14, 2023

I'm looking forward to seeing what happens in next week's penultimate issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Holo-Ween #3

Oct 21, 2023

We get a great twist at the close of this issue, which brings in another great villain from Star Trek who much like Redjac feeds on the fears or others. A very familiar alien to the Next Generation fans as he appeared in one of the better episodes from the first season.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek: Holo-Ween #4

Oct 28, 2023

This book has been a real Halloween treat and has made what has been a rather stressful October for me go by a little quicker.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Trek: Picard - Countdown #1

Nov 30, 2019

Both writers do a great job of capturing the voices of the characters and the dialogue that we hear Picard say is very much in keeping with things that the character has said in the past. Especially when it comes to respecting all sentient lifeforms.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Picard - Countdown #2

Dec 19, 2019

Kirsten Beyer and Mike Johnson have me hooked. I can't wait to read the next issue but do have one wish and that is for Picard to mention the Prime Directive at least once.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Picard - Countdown #3

Jan 29, 2020

Overall. This is a pretty good prequel story. It at least tells the backstory of Zhaban and Laris and how they came to be living with Picard, but we are still in the dark as to whether or not Geordie LaForge survives the Mars attack. Hopefully, we will see the backstory to the synthetic attack of mars played out in another mini-series or novel because that for me as a life long Star Trek fan is as intriguing as the backstory was to Khan and the Eugenics Wars were.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Picard - Stargazer #1

Sep 4, 2022

When Picard and a team beam down to the planet. He finds that the planet isn't what it used to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Picard - Stargazer #2

Oct 9, 2022

So far. I'm loving this story. It feels very much like an episode of Star Trek and I can't wait to see what happens next as we are left with a fantastic cliffhanger as well as a shocking reveal.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Picard - Stargazer #3

Nov 5, 2022

This finishes off a nice filler story that sits nicely between seasons one and two of the TV series. I really enjoyed how the story shows us the differences between Picard and Seven of Nine, but also shows that they both meet somewhere in the middle when it comes to the art of diplomacy. I really liked how Seven uses her own experiences in order to relate to Reska and get a dialogue going with her that enables Picard and Starfleet to help create an accord between Reska and her people and the Jenjorans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Star Trek: Picard's Academy (2023) #1

Sep 18, 2023

Overall. This first issue looks like its setting up what could be a fun series. I look forward to seeing if the comics writer includes any of the stories told about Picard's time at the academy that got mentioned during Star Trek: The Next Generation. As there are a few good ones that they could draw upon.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Star Trek: Picard's Academy (2023) #2

Nov 14, 2023

Now absolutely in TNG the younger Picard we saw in the episode Tapestry could be kind of a jerk. But I don't think he was ever as big of a jackass as Maggs seems to be painting him as in this book. Sure that may be some redemption for him to get to toward the close of the story arc. But this is feeling like a character deconstruction too far.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Star Trek: Picard's Academy (2023) #3

Dec 18, 2023

Thankfully for Picard, some of his classmates break him and Resh up and help the future Enterprise captain back to his quarters where they all open up to each other about their shared fears for their forthcoming exam.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Trek: Picard's Academy (2023) #4

Jan 6, 2024

Overall a solid issue that leaves us with a nice cliffhanger to keep us guessing to the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Trek: Picard's Academy (2023) #5

Feb 3, 2024

OverallPicard's Academy continues to give us a bit of insight into Jean Luc's early days at Starfleet Academy and shows how difficult he found it to make friends. However, one of the elements missing from the story is some of the incidents mentioned throughout TNG's run whenever Picard talked about his time in the Academy or whenever someone else mentioned it. For example, in The Best of Both Worlds Admiral Hanson talks about how Picard surprised everyone by winning the Academy Marathon. It would be great to see some of these anecdotal stories brought to life in this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Trek: Picard's Academy (2023) #6

Mar 5, 2024

Sam Maggs finishes her Picard story with a bit of flair and makes clever use of Boothby to help wrap things up. Throughout this story, we have seen a very different Jean Luc Picard from the one that we know and love. It's been quite a character journey as the young Picard we see initially isn't, particularly the most likable of people. But by the close of this story we get to the Picard that Admiral Hanson describes in The Best of Both Worlds.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek: Resurgence #1

Nov 19, 2022

This is a strong start to a story that brings back the Talarians and explores them a little more. I really enjoyed the fact that the writers have brought back Jono who was the surrogate human son of Talarian captain Endar and grandson of Starfleet Vice Admiral Connaught Rossa. I also loved how Jono got introduced into this story on the closing page. As it serves as a great cliffhanger for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Resurgence #2

Dec 19, 2022

Overall. This is a comic that older Star Trek fans that remember the golden age of TNG and DS9 will appreciate.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Resurgence #3

Jan 26, 2023

This comic book prequel to the forthcoming Resurgence game is doing a great job of setting the scene and I'm really looking forward to the game's release on PS5 when it finally comes out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Resurgence #4

Feb 20, 2023

Overall. This has been a really solid Star Trek story and I look forward to reading the conclusion and how it will be used in the forthcoming game.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Resurgence #5

Mar 18, 2023

The closing pages of this issue are nicely done. As we get a glimpse of Captain Sonalo's new first officer, who will be one of the playable characters in the forthcoming video game.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Star Trek: Strange New Worlds (2022): The Scorpius Run #1

Aug 27, 2023

Scorpius Run makes for a solid story, but thus far it's not really proving to be that original. Races that take place in space have been done many times before across a fairly wide range of comic books. That said. The setup for the story is done fairly well and it is early days as far as the story goes. So we'll hopefully see some original twists come up in later issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek: Strange New Worlds (2022): The Illyrian Enigma #1

Dec 23, 2022

This is a really strong opening issue and I can't wait to read more of this story and find out what happens next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Star Trek: Strange New Worlds (2022): The Scorpius Run #2

Oct 7, 2023

This second issue of The Scorpius Run does a pretty good job of moving the story forward. I liked the little insight that we got into how the other alien crews function and how we get shown that through Una and Spock's eyes. I also loved how well Mike Johnson and Ryan Parrott have written for Lt. Erica Ortegas, who is a character that I feel has been underwritten for on the TV series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Strange New Worlds (2022): The Illyrian Enigma #2

Jan 27, 2023

OverallThis book continues to entertain as we get a little insight into what may be happening in the space between seasons one and two of the series. I'm really enjoying the manipulative Da-Kil and how he seems to be playing a game with Captain Pike.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Star Trek: Strange New Worlds (2022): The Scorpius Run #3

Nov 6, 2023

While the idea of a race through a dangerous sector of space isn't exactly new. Mike Johnson continues to make up for this fact with some interesting characterizations and alien races. Added to that. This story provides some great character growth for Lt. Erica Ortegas, who is a character who gets woefully neglected in the TV series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Strange New Worlds (2022): The Illyrian Enigma #3

Feb 25, 2023

This penultimate issue does a great job of setting things up for next month's finale, which will probably see Pike and the crew head off to Vulcan to find out what involvement the Vulcans had in the fate of the Illyrian planet. But will they also be able to solve the Illyrian Enigma and find a way to clear the Enterprise's First Officer?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Strange New Worlds (2022): The Scorpius Run #4

Dec 9, 2023

The Scorpius Run has made for a fun mini-series and I look forward to seeing how it all ends when the next issue comes out in January of 2024.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Strange New Worlds (2022): The Illyrian Enigma #4

Apr 4, 2023

Overall. I had fun with this series and would love for IDW to commit to an ongoing series using these characters. I'd also love to learn more about the Illrian race and see how they progress in both the TV and Comics universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Strange New Worlds (2022): The Scorpius Run #5

Jan 15, 2024

A fun story with a satisfying conclusion. Now all we need is a new story or maybe even an ongoing Star Trek: Strange New Worlds Comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: The Motion Picture - Echoes (2023) #1

May 18, 2023

Having a little experience with Parallel Universes. Kirk convinces an admiral that only he and the Enterprise crew can resolve this problem. However, things take on a complicated turn when The Enterprise chases Akris's ship into The Neutral Zone.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek: The Motion Picture - Echoes (2023) #2

Jun 19, 2023

It will be great to see the alternate universe that General Uhura and Akris come from in a future issue. But given that the run is only for five issues. I'm not sure if Guggenheim will have enough room to cover that. But if this were to become an ongoing Star Trek series that takes place between STMP and Wrath of Khan. Am pretty sure that Guggenheim and some other writers and artists could get plenty of mileage out of that.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek: The Motion Picture - Echoes (2023) #3

Jul 15, 2023

This was a strong issue with some great character moments.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Trek: The Motion Picture - Echoes (2023) #4

Aug 13, 2023

This penultimate issue does a solid job of setting things up for the dramatic finale, which we'll get to read about next month. The banter between Spock and McCoy is bang on point and as fun to read as it was to watch on the show back in the day. It is obvious that Marc Guggenheim has watched a lot of hours of the original series to be able to portray the Spock and McCoy dynamic so well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: The Motion Picture - Echoes (2023) #5

Sep 17, 2023

OverallStar Trek: The Motion PictureEchoes has been a fun Star Trek Adventure that I truly enjoyed. I loved seeing a story involving the Crew just after Star Trek: The Motion Picture and I loved that they used the Romulans and parallel universe versions of two of Kirk's famous crew. The alternative version of Uhura was particularly well written and I enjoyed her warning to Kirk in the final few pages of the issue because it works as good foreshadowing for the events we saw in Star Trek II: The Wrath of Khan.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek: Voyager: Mirrors and Smoke #1

Dec 30, 2019

This was a fun story, which I'd love to see expanded given how it ended.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Voyager - Seven's Reckoning #1

Nov 26, 2020

This opening issue of 'Sevens Reckoning' sets the stage nicely. It is obviously set during Seven's early days onboard Voyager, which is consistent with how stilted her dialogue is written. I really enjoyed the story set up and the initial investigation of the ship. It felt very much like how an episode of Voyager would have started and nicely fits somewhere into what may have been a missing adventure from the show's fourth season.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Trek: Voyager - Seven's Reckoning #2

Dec 17, 2020

I can't wait to see how all this will play out in issue 3, which is likely to see things properly kick-off.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Voyager - Seven's Reckoning #3

Jan 23, 2021

A solid penultimate issue, which sets the table for next month's finale.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Voyager - Seven's Reckoning #4

Feb 13, 2021

A solid story, which has a satisfying conclusion, which feels very consistent with how things would have played out in the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Year Five #11

Jun 8, 2020

This is a great start to a story that will resolve over the next few issues. The question is what will Kirk and Gary Seven come up with that will allow them both to continue on their respective missions. What compromise will have to be made? I can't wait to find out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Trek: Year Five #12

Jul 6, 2020

So the first year of Trek is a wrap, but year two of Star Trek: Year Five will get underway next month in what I am sure will be another epic adventure.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Trek: Year Five #13

Aug 9, 2020

I'm rubbing my hands together with glee for the next issue of this book. I'm hooked.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Year Five #14

Sep 16, 2020

We're left with an open-ended close to the story as we wait with bated breath to find out if Kirk and his crew will take a side trip to investigate an area of space that has gone unexplored. It's just enough to whet our appetites for next month's installment.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Trek: Year Five #15

Oct 31, 2020

A pretty solid start to a story, which might well have some Romulan input as the story progresses. Then again I am only guessing about the Romulan involvement.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Year Five #16

Nov 16, 2020

A really strong issue with a lot of connective tissue for future political intrigues as The Enterprise slowly journeys back to Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Year Five #17

Dec 31, 2020

I can't wait to see what adventures await in 2021 for the Star Trek: Year Five comics.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Year Five #18

Jan 10, 2021

This is a solid start to what could potentially be a really good chapter in these final missions of Kirk's original five-year journey.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Trek: Year Five #19

Feb 20, 2021

OverallWriter Jim McCann does a nice job of drawing his story to a satisfying conclusion. But we are still left wondering what happened to Isis and what Gary 7's next move will be. Especially given that his orders are to take out Kirk and the Enterprise crew.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Trek: Year Five #20

May 20, 2021

I look forward to seeing how this story develops in the next issue. A brilliant start.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Year Five #21

Jul 4, 2021

Gary Sevens' appearance in this issue was quite dramatic and only added to the fun. Although, I am a bit concerned with where this particular aspect of Year Five is going. Particularly, given that Gary Seven is a favorite character of mine from the original Star Trek series. And I'd not want to see him being Kirks' enemy forever. So I do hope it gets resolved.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Trek: Year Five #22

Jul 13, 2021

OverallKelly and Lanzing do a brilliant job on this issue. It felt very much like an episode of the TV show as the character interactions were so consistent with how they'd have been performed. Also, the return of Ambassador Renei of Andoria as well as Gary Seven and the Tholian attack add that extra element of tension to the proceedings. Which makes for a fantastic cliffhanger. Bring on issue 23.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Trek: Year Five #23

Aug 1, 2021

Year Five continues to boldly tell Star Trek stories that respect the show's continuity and characters. I look forward to seeing what happens in next month's issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Trek: Year Five #24

Sep 20, 2021

I didn't mind Gary Seven being a villain for a while as he was following the orders of Aegis. But I felt the story didn't resolve particularly well because taking the enhancements away from Gary Seven is stripping him of a big part of what makes him such a unique Star Trek character.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Trek: Year Five #25

Oct 10, 2021

While not an essential issue in this series. This final bumper story, which is told by various writers gives a little closure to the story. And lets us look at events that might have taken place after the original series ended.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Trek: Year Five: Valentine's Day Special #1

Feb 13, 2020

This is well a look for Star Trek fans. Irrespective of whether you are a fan of Captain Kirk of not. Buy it now. Make it So. Engage.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Star Wars (2014) #22

Aug 29, 2016

My guess is the third issue will seeSergeant Kreel and his Elite Squad of Stormtroopers dispatched to mess with the rebels. I look forward to seeing the potential stand off.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2014) #23

Sep 29, 2016

Great issue. Can't wait to read the next one. I kind of want it now.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars (2014) #24

Oct 29, 2016

This issue is an epic battle from pretty much start to finish and we get some great art work from Jorge Molina depicting Lukes battle with Kreel.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Star Wars (2014) #26

Dec 31, 2016

Hopefully this story picks up a little more next issue because this opening chapter was really hit and miss with me.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Star Wars (2014) #74

Nov 15, 2019

I look forward to next month's issue so I can see how this story arc will meld into the next one. The past few months of this ongoing series have been really strong and have introduced some fantastic characters along the way. So I am looking forward to seeing how they come across Hoth and what difficulties they get into as they set up the new Rebel base. That is assuming that we get to see it happen.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Star Wars (2014) #75

Nov 24, 2019

Either way. Whatever happens. I'm sticking with this until Marvel decide to end the ongoing. But it would be great to actually advance the story forward so new fans can see what happens between films as well as events that happen in post Return of the Jedi. Maybe show us how the First Order came to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Wars (2014): Empire Ascendant #1

Dec 20, 2019

OverallStar Wars: Empire Ascendant is a great way to show readers the larger 'Star Wars' comicsverse and show off all the talent and different stories that are on offer. At present, we only really cover the main Star Wars title and plan to continue to do so as well as picking up the odd mini-series along the way. But reading this book has given me some food for thought in regards to whether we should add one of the other ongoing titles.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars (2020) #1

Jan 5, 2020

I look forward to seeing how things develop as this series moves forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars (2020) #2

Feb 2, 2020

OverallOverall. A really strong issue, which is building on events rather nicely. I'm particularly enjoying the fact that Lando is having to earn the trust of Leia and the rebels. Given that we never got the opportunity to see that happen in the movie series. A return to Bespin awaits in the next issue and I am looking forward to seeing how that will play out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #3

Feb 29, 2020

I also liked the fact that Lando has gone back to Cloud City for Lobot, who was instrumental in helping him get Leia and Chewbacca out of Cloud City during ‘Star Wars: The Empire Strikes Back'. It will be interesting to see how he is used as this story develops.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars (2020) #4

Mar 22, 2020

Charles Soule writes a pretty fast-paced action-adventure story here. But I was a little disappointed that we didn't get to spend at least one more issue on Bespin give the iconic place it has in Star Wars. Thankfully we do get a valid reason for the rush in which the rebels escape so there is some story logic for what seems like a slightly rushed story arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars (2020) #5

Aug 8, 2020

Verla gets a great introduction and looks like she could be an interesting character and a pretty good teacher for Luke. I can't wait to find out what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #6

Sep 20, 2020

Charles Soule creates another action-packed issue, which expands on Luke Skywalker's journey to becoming the Jedi that we eventually see in 'Star Wars: Return Of The Jedi', but we also get a little foreshadowing for the much-derided 'Star Wars: The Last Jedi' during the sequence where Verla warns Luke about his future relationship with the Force. Hopefully, we'll get to see a lot more mythology surrounding the force in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #7

Oct 11, 2020

OverallThis was a solid issue, which did a great job of exploring the backstory of Commander Zahra while simultaneously providing us with a few fun nods to characters from the wider Star Wars universe. The story provides a little cameo from Director Krennic and Galen Erso gets namechecked at the start of the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #8

Nov 7, 2020

I look forward to seeing more of Zahra and Leia's relationship as it unfolds in future issues. It will be interesting to see how this first encounter will affect Leia's judgment in future stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars (2020) #9

Dec 10, 2020

A good story, which put me in mind of some of the old war movies I used to watch with my late father.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #10

Jan 8, 2021

Overall. A great issue that leaves us with lots to look forward to in the month ahead.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars (2020) #11

Feb 4, 2021

Meanwhile, back at the rebel fleet. Lobot is still being used as a link up to the old droid in order to help C3PO record the ancient language needs for the new code. Unfortunately, the effort it is taking is hurting Lobot and his friend Lando isn't happy with the situation. Leia, who is thinking of the bigger picture orders C3PO to carry on working. But when Lando objects and tries to put a stop to things. She orders Kes Dameron to take him to the brig. Will it all be for nothing?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars (2020) #12

Mar 14, 2021

‘Reflections on the Lost!' does a brilliant job of giving us some backstory for Han Solo, who we'll not see a great deal of in this ongoing series because he is frozen in carbonite and probably mounted on Jabba's wall by now. Charles Soule spins an interesting story, which fills in some character details for Han. But also manages to give us more of a backstory for the Dameron's whose young son Poe has a big future ahead of him.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars (2020) #13

May 15, 2021

Overall. Charles Soule does a solid job of setting the story up. The question is. Will Luke and Chewie catch up with Boba Fett? Will they meet Valance along the way? We don't know, but it sure is going to be fun finding out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars (2020) #14

Jun 20, 2021

Charles Soule does a great job with this issue. I really enjoyed the use of Amilyn Holdo as the person that delivers the news about Han to Leia. Additionally, I especially liked the callbacks to 'Solo: A Star Wars Story' as Lando recalls the events that took place when he is talking with Chewie about going on the mission. Of course this being Lando, he does have another agenda. For my money. This is the best issue of the 'War of the Bounty Hunters' story to date.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Wars (2020) #16

Aug 22, 2021

Overall. It was a really fun and enjoyable read. I look forward to seeing what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Star Wars (2020) #17

Oct 2, 2021

Overall. A really great issue, which felt very much like a real Star Wars story. I can't wait to read how this all concludes and leads into the events we have already seen in Return of the Jedi.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #18

Nov 8, 2021

"COLLISION COURSE" lives up to the hype and I can't wait to read the next issue. And revisit this entire story arc when it gets released as a collected volume.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #19

Dec 12, 2021

I loved how well Luke is written. Soule does a great job of highlighting Luke's struggle to let go of his doubt and trust in the force. Also, we get a really nice cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars (2020) #20

Jan 15, 2022

OverallAnother fun chapter in Luke Skywalkers journey to becoming the young Jedi Knight that we wind up eventually meeting in Star Wars: Return of The Jedi. I really enjoyed Luke's exasperation with the Holocron not initially giving him the lessons that he wanted. But also liked the introduction of Elzar Mann and the conversation that he winds up having with Luke. Especially the part where Mann explains that the Jedi Order has always had to adapt to the times and has never remained the same.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars (2020) #21

Mar 6, 2022

This is a pretty solid story, which gives us a little more insight into who Poe Dameron's parents were.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Wars (2020) #22

Apr 17, 2022

A real good opening chapter with an exciting cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars (2020) #23

May 8, 2022

The final page of this issue makes a real statement of intent and sets things up beautifully for next month. But I can't help but feel that it has borrowed somewhat from a certain scene from the season one finale of The Mandalorian.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars (2020) #24

Jun 12, 2022

A fantastic book. I can't wait for the final issue next month. Hopefully, it's a bumper one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #25

Jul 23, 2022

OverallWith Star Wars #25. Charles Soule brings some really nice stories to the table, which do a good job of expanding on established chapters within the Skywalker saga. The two strongest stories for me were parts one and two of The Lesson. I particularly enjoyed the art and colors in the Darth Vader part of that story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars (2020) #26

Aug 22, 2022

Elsewhere on the Death Star Lady Qi'ra's nephew and his wife have been sent orders to create havoc, which sees them having to also plan their own escape from the oppressive Empire, in a shuttle that will get used again by a certain Han Solo in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars (2020) #27

Sep 12, 2022

This issue of Star Wars does a great job of giving us a smaller story that fits into the whole. We get to see the story of a couple of unsung heroes in the form of Melton and his wife as they work to escape from the Empire while working for the Crimson Dawn. The action beats that happen while they try to escape the Tie Fighters are really well written. I especially enjoyed the brief moment of triumph when Melton's wife successfully shoots down one of the Ties.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars (2020) #28

Oct 17, 2022

This is a fun issue that wraps up the story arc for Melton and his family rather nicely. Charles Soule makes clever use of these unknown characters to tell the story of how the Rebels found out about the second Deathstar.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars (2020) #29

Nov 6, 2022

Overall this is a fun little story that highlights Amilyn Holdo and explores her relationship with Leia, which was only really briefly hinted at in Star Wars: The Last Jedi. The book ends with a fun cliffhanger in which the group winds up in unexplored space.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #30

Jan 10, 2023

No, Space felt like Star Wars doing its own take of a Twilight Zone episode as you are never quite sure when the next plot twist will come. I look forward to reading the next issue to find out how the gang will figure out a way of getting home.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars (2020) #31

Feb 21, 2023

OverallThis was a solid issue that does a solid job of giving us more story about the Kezarat Fuel Tankers and what happened to them. I really liked the wall art telling the story of how a Jedi helped the Kezarat in their fight against the Nihil. And I also enjoyed Luke's response to Blythe's young son.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars (2020) #32

Mar 6, 2023

This is a fairly fun issue and is definitely building to what will be an interesting end to the story, which depicts all the events that happened prior to Return of The Jedi. I only hope that Marvel and their writers will give us the adventures of our favorite heroes in a post-Return of The Jedi world to fill in the gaps left between Jedi and The Force Awakens.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars (2020) #33

Apr 10, 2023

I look forward to seeing how this will all tie into the build-up to Return of The Jedi.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars (2020) #34

May 7, 2023

This is a fantastic issue that sets out to answer a question that this fan has had for years. How did Luke go about constructing his new saber and where did her get the components from? So am pretty happy to be finally getting this question answered and look forward to seeing what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars (2020) #35

Jun 13, 2023

OverallThis was a really good story in which we get to learn a little more about Kyber Crystals and a Jedi's relationship with their lightsaber. I really enjoyed the character of Dr. Cuata and the way in which it is established that he is able to communicate with Kyber Crystals and understand what they have to say. I also liked how he put Luke Skywalker to work by getting him to use the force to also link with Kyber Crystals.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars (2020) #36

Jul 10, 2023

I also loved how this story sets up things for Nien Nunb who goes on to be Lando's co-pilot in the Death Star attack in Return of the Jedi.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars (2020) #37

Aug 14, 2023

OverallAn interesting issue that provides the reason why Lando was on Tatooine when we saw him in Star Wars: Return of the Jedi. It will be interesting to find out what Lobot's ultimate fate is as we never saw him in Return of the Jedi.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars (2020) #38

Sep 16, 2023

A pretty solid story, which is obviously set a number of weeks before the events that we see in Star Wars: Return of the Jedi as Lando uses the same outfit to get into Jabba's palace than the one that he wore in the movie. It will be interesting to see how this all builds up to those events and what will happen once the story moves beyond Jedi. If indeed Marvel chooses to give us a look at these popular characters in the post Jedi world.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars (2020) #39

Oct 24, 2023

Overall. A really fun issue that continues to fill in the gap between Empire Strikes back and Return of the Jedi. I only hope that we get a series of comics that follow these legacy characters through the events that took place after Jedi.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars (2020) #40

Nov 7, 2023

Another solid issue that does a brilliant job of continuing the story. I can't wait to see how all of this plays out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars (2020) #41

Dec 11, 2023

The Artwork Madibek Musabekovdoes a great job on this issue. We get some great art depicting the battle between Luke, Leia, Lando, and Chewbacca who are vastly outnumbered by droids who are on a mission to capture and assimilate all organics. The closing image perfectly sets things up for the next issue, which begins a new story arc for the ongoing Star Wars comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars (2020) #42

Jan 13, 2024

We get left with a fun cliffhanger in which it very much looks like Luke is about to face an opponent within the Crystal who was maybe just as powerful as Vader. I'm looking forward to the next issue to see how this gets resolved.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #43

Feb 26, 2024

This is an awesome Star Wars story that gets into the metaphysics of The Force as we see Luke undergo a sort of shamanic journey where he lives an entire lifetime in order to heal the red khyber crystal. I enjoyed the dialogue between Luke and the Sith throughout this story. The Sith has a few memorable bits of dialogue where they talk about the value of their pain and try to justify why they can't let it go.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #44

Mar 11, 2024

We've been waiting a few months for this particular story arc and it's gotten off to a great start. I enjoy the fact that Calrissian is somewhat remorseful for his actions as it's a side of him we haven't seen before. I also quite enjoyed the discussion at the start of the book between Leia, Mon Mothma, General Madine, and Admiral Akbar about how they should proceed in pursuing justice for the Alliance.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars (2020) #45

Apr 6, 2024

Writer Charles Soule continues to intrigue and give readers plenty to chew over with his characterizations and subplots. I enjoyed the sequence where Leia gets questioned about Lando and how she explains that his actions in betraying his friend Han Solo were not committed for selfish reasons.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars (2020) #46

May 27, 2024

A fantastic issue in which we learn the reasons why Mon Mothma became a leader of the Rebellion when it would have been all to easy for someone as wealthy as her to just sit back and let the Empire get on with it. The conversation between Mothma and Hatchi is brilliantly executed with some sharp dialogue by Charles Soule and some excellent visuals from Musebekov. This is a great example of how art can marry up well with solid writing.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #47

Jun 14, 2024

Charles Soule does a fantastic job of wrapping up this story arc and even goes to the trouble of doing a bit of foreshadowing of Lando's future promotion to General, which is something we see in Star Wars: Return of the Jedi. The character of advocate Georgio has been a lot of fun to watch during all the issues of this story arc, but its only by the close of the story that we get an inkling of just what type of person she is when it comes to manipulating events to get herself the desired outcome.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #48

Jul 21, 2024

The idea that a small fleet of ships managed to escape the destruction of Alderaan is an intriguing one and it will be interesting to see where all of this leads and how it will build towards the starting part of Return of The Jedi in which we all saw the rescue of Han Solo.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars (2020) #49

Aug 25, 2024

The Path of Light, which is the penultimate issue of this Star Wars series sets everything up nicely for the final issue, which we'll see next month. I liked some of the parallels between Zahra's journey and that of Anakin. And how her severe injuries just made her double down on her belief in the Empires and her determination to hurt Leia. Hopefully, we'll get a third run of Star Wars comics from Marvel that will fill in the 30 or so year gap of what happened to Luke, Han, and Leia between events seen in Jedi and Star Wars: The Force Awakens. I believe issue 50 of this run is going to feature a young Ben Solo, so it will be interesting to see what that issue delivers in the way of backstory in regards to how he strayed from Luke's guidance.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars (2020) #50

Sep 16, 2024

The StoryWhile contemplating the past, present and future. Jedi Master Luke Skywalker tells his young Padwan Ben Solo about the last adventure he shared with Princess Leia, Lando Calrissian, and Chewie before the events seen in Return of The Jedi. In the story we see Luke dive into a bunch of mushrooms where he has himself quite the trip in which he is offered information about a weapon that can kill The Emperor, but what are the costs of such a weapon?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Wars (2020): Life Day #1

Dec 18, 2021

Although it didn't feature the best stories I have ever read. Star Wars: Life Day does feature some fun stories in which we get to see the meaning of the Galaxies celebrations while also seeing Han and Chewie in time somewhere between the end of Return of The Jedi and the start of Force Awakens.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Wars: Battle of Jakku (2024): Insurgency Rising #1

Oct 5, 2024

Somewhere in the Anoat System Moff Adelhard has told all his troops that the rumored deaths of Darth Vader and the Emperor are not true. He is hoping that this lie will help him retain power for the Empire in whatever form that may take. He has a mysterious group of Acolytes on his side and will do whatever it takes to win the war.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Battle of Jakku (2024): Republic Under Siege #1

Nov 23, 2024

Alex Segura has crafted an intriguing character in Grand Moff Adelhard, who looks like he might become another fan favorite. Speaking of which, I really enjoyed the introduction of Doctor Aphra in this story and can't wait to see how she'll play a role in the overall narrative.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Battle of Jakku (2024): Insurgency Rising #2

Oct 19, 2024

This is a great second chapter for the Insurgency storyline in The Battle Of Jakku series. I look forward to seeing how the other series in this range of books will feed into all of this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Battle of Jakku (2024): Republic Under Siege #2

Nov 30, 2024

This second issue of Republic Under Siege does a great job of building on the events from the previous books. I particularly enjoyed the interactions between Luke Skywalker and Doctor Aphra. What I really like about Aphra is that she's not taking sidesshe's a neutral figure, working for herself with her own agenda. It makes her a much more interesting character, as you never know where she might show up next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Battle of Jakku (2024): Republic Under Siege #3

Dec 10, 2024

This latest issue does an excellent job of tying together several plot threads, giving us a clearer view of the various players as events begin to spiral. Toward the end of the book, Adelhard is stunned to discover a planned betrayal by his lover, who happens to be a member of the Acolytes. On top of that, we're treated to a fantastic cliffhanger where another bounty hunter makes their entrance, clearly on a mission of their own.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Battle of Jakku (2024): Insurgency Rising #3

Nov 2, 2024

This third issue builds beautifully on the characters and themes that have been established in previous issues. I quite enjoyed the dialogue that takes place between Dameron and his team as well as the surprise reveal of one of their allies. The issue ends on a fantastic cliffhanger. I look forward to reading the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Battle of Jakku (2024): Insurgency Rising #4

Nov 9, 2024

Overall, this final book of the Insurgency series does a great job of wrapping this up while also setting up a few things for Star Wars Battle Of Jakku 2 Republic Under Siege #1 which will hit comic stores on the 20 November.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Battle of Jakku (2024): Republic Under Siege #4

Dec 16, 2024

Overall, this is a fantastic lead-in to the final four books of the series. I can't wait to see how it all plays out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #1

Mar 17, 2020

A really strong first issue with some thick and fast action.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #2

Mar 29, 2020

Overall. I'm loving this series and can't wait to learn more about Valance and his past. The addition of Boba Fett and Bossk is a fantastic bonus for this first story arc and does a great job of enhancing the story without undermining the lead character.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #3

Jun 28, 2020

It has been a bit of a wait for this issue due to the hold up that was created by the pandemic, but it proved to be worth the wait. The illustration and sequential storytelling of the fight between Bossk and Valance was brilliantly done and the dialogue from writer Ethan Sacks was everything that you'd expect from the two characters who have a longstanding hatred of each other. A hatred that I'd like to see explored more in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #4

Aug 22, 2020

Ethan Sacks continues to deliver the goods with the rough and ready group of characters from the edgier parts of the Star Wars universe. Valance continues to an interesting character who is very much another Star Wars version of the mysterious stranger archetype. Much like Mando from The Mandalorian. Valance will make alliances when they serve his interest and the team up with T'onga makes for an interesting if somewhat short-lived dynamic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #5

Sep 27, 2020

The fight between Boba Fett and Valance was brilliant drawn and wonderfully scripted. We get a reminder of just how ruthless Boba Fett is and by comparison, Valance has more of honor and a sense of right and wrong. The contrast between the two Bounty Hunters is going to make things interesting should they meet in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #6

Oct 24, 2020

A strong introduction to a new story arc, which gives us some nice background information about Valance, which we did not know before. I look forward to seeing how this progresses in the next few months.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #7

Nov 19, 2020

Overall Ethan Sacks continues to add more layers to Valance and has used these last two issues to fill in some of the blanks about this Bounty Hunter's past. In a way Star Wars: Bounty Hunters is taking on a similar narrative to The Mandalorian only minus the child, The Mandalorians and the Jedi. In fact, the world that Valance deals in will allow more exploration of the Underworld. It will not surprise me if we see a few Hutts in issues to come. The decision to leave Cadelia with Yura is a good one. Had she stayed in the care of Valance. It would have limited story options moving forward. Plus I suspect she and Yura will work better as recurring characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #8

Dec 29, 2020

A really fun issue. And a pretty good start to a new story arc. Which may or may not reunite Valance with his old friend Han Solo.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #9

Jan 28, 2021

The high point of this issue for me is when Valance flys the X-Wing. The observant fans will notice that the Fighter has the blue sash on it as opposed to the red. Which makes it look more like a sequel era X-Wing. But other than that. It's an awesome visual that had me whooping for Valance to open a can of kickass.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #10

Mar 23, 2021

Ethan Sacks really should have retitled THE TERMINUS GAUNTLET to DIE HARD ON THE REBEL TRANSPORT because of the methodical way in which Valance operates in taking down the pirates felt very much like DIE HARD. I also loved the reference to Han Solo being in the custody of Boba Fett as Dengar sort of let's slip that he missed out on that Bounty when Valance gets some much-deserved payback.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #11

Apr 19, 2021

OverallThis is a fantastic issue. I love how Ethan Sacks captured the cold-blooded nature of Bossk. Having him use the other people who were being hunted as bait was fantastic. The dialogue between Bossk and those around him was awesome. I could actually hear Bossk's voice in my head when I was reading. I'm looking forward to seeing how this story progresses. Especially given that Valance and Dengar are probably going to cross paths with Bossk as they seek Boba Fett.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #12

May 22, 2021

A fantastic issue that sets things up brilliantly for the crossover series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #13

Jun 13, 2021

OverallThis crossover event is developing quite nicely. We get a great twist at the end when it comes to the revelations about Crimson Dawn, but who is running them. I can't wait to read more when the Star Wars ongoing comic releases later this month. In the meantime. It is probably good to keep in mind that it is never a good idea to annoy a Wookiee.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #16

Sep 26, 2021

The issue closes out with a nice little cliffhanger where we see Denger hanging over some information to The Dawn.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #17

Nov 7, 2021

A really strong issue, which opens up all sorts of story possibilities. I loved how this issue ends and can't wait to see what will happen next and how that will link in with other parts of the universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #18

Dec 4, 2021

A really good start for a new story arc, which manages to connect Darth Vader, Valance, and The Crimson Dawn. I can't wait to read more. Especially when it comes to Valance's story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #19

Jan 2, 2022

A fantastic issue that ties brilliantly into the whole Crimson Dawn storyline, but does so in such a way that it doesn't ruin Valance's story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #20

Jan 17, 2022

The final page leaves us with a fun cliffhanger as we learn of a certain Bounty Hunter that Crimson Dawn is going to send after T'onga and her people. Things are going to get interesting in the next issue as we see a return for Dengar.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #21

Apr 3, 2022

This book along with the main Star Wars title continues to be a highlight of my month. Great work.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #22

Apr 10, 2022

A fun story with some brilliant character moments and great action beats. This is Star Wars comics at their best.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #23

Jun 5, 2022

A solid issue that had me on the edge of my seat. For some strange reason, I keep hearing Dengar speak in a kind of East End London accent, which am sure is more to do with my imagination than it has anything to do with the writing. But I think if we ever get to see Dengar again in the live-action series or the animations. He'd be voiced by someone like Jason Stathan.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #24

Jul 9, 2022

Another fantastic issue. I really enjoy how Dengar seems to have a gift for rubbing everyone he meets up with the wrong way. Ethan Sacks has done a fabulous job of voicing Dengar throughout the run of this comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #25

Jul 18, 2022

Another fun issue. Which ends with T'onga having to show herself as the true leader that she is.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #27

Sep 20, 2022

Bounty Hunters continues to be one of my favorite comics from Marvel's extended Star Wars universe. I really like the way in which we have newer characters in Losha and T'onga blended with classic Star Wars Bounty Hunters like Zuckuss, 4-Elom and of course Bossk. I also liked how this story gives us a little more character development for Tasu.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #28

Nov 7, 2022

Panic At The Accretion Disco! was a fun issue with lots of great action. But it also does a great job of setting up a new storyline in which T'onga, Losha and their fellow Bounty Hunters are going to go up against Valance as they accept a job that will pit them off against him. So there is much to look forward to in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #29

Dec 20, 2022

Overall this continues to be a fun book with some fun character moments and great action.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #30

Jan 27, 2023

Overall, this story arc is starting to pay some real dividends and I can't wait to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #31

Feb 22, 2023

A brilliant issue with some fantastic character moments. I loved the part at the end where Zuckus boast about his race's expertise for finding things when T'onga and the crew are looking for Valance who has just fallen off a rock face. The art as mentioned above is truly epic in this issue and the battle between Vader and Valance has been well and truly earned. But there is still unfinished business, which means that the empire has not finished with Valance yet.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #32

Mar 17, 2023

OverallThis was a fantastic issue that gives us some interesting insight into Zuckuss's people and their ways. I loved how the hallucinations that Zuckuss has mirror the life and death struggle that he is going through while 4-LOM is doing all he can to save his friend. Additionally, I also love that we have Valance back with the group as his ongoing conflict with Bossk is just so much fun to see.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #33

Apr 18, 2023

This penultimate issue of this story arc delivers the goods as Commander Versio demonstrates how sneaky she can be. I loved the eventual meeting between Versio and T'onga and the brief fight that follows. I'm also enjoying the continued antagonistic relationship between Bossk and Valance, which is something that has been boiling over since the third issue, which is a long time given that this book started its run in early 2020.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #34

May 26, 2023

OverallThis issue does a solid job of wrapping up the arc involving the Empire's mission to wipe Valance's memory, but it also sees some changes to Tonga's crew as they prepare for their next big job. I really liked the brief flashback that we were shown about Valance's childhood, which showed us the stakes of what would happen should the empire win. I also liked how the issue closed out with Tonga having to make a really difficult command decision.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #35

Jun 24, 2023

This is a fun story, which ends on an interesting cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #36

Jul 17, 2023

I continue to look forward to this more grounded part of the Star Wars universe. And I look forward to seeing where this story finishes up in next month's issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #37

Sep 5, 2023

I also liked seeing the Cloners on Kamino getting used again as a story element as it's been a while since we last saw them in the comics.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #38

Sep 26, 2023

This continues to be an enthralling story that continues to keep me guessing. Although it was revealed to some extent that Kligson was a bit of a crook in the last issue. This issue pretty much confirms it. I loved the fact that Kligson was speaking to T'onga and her crew all along via having remotely taken operation of the leader of the Droid Haven. I also enjoyed seeing the backstory to how that all happened.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #39

Oct 14, 2023

Ethan Sacks continues to weave an interesting story, which sees the friendships between T'onga and the other Bounty Hunters that she has added to her crew truly tested. It is also a great issue that explores T'onga's feelings toward Valance as she thinks of him like a brother.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #40

Nov 27, 2023

I can't wait to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #41

Dec 20, 2023

A really strong penultimate issue, which hope has laid the groundwork for a great finale.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Bounty Hunters #42

Jan 21, 2024

The series resolves with some nice endings for T'onga, Losha, and Valance as they get a chance at a relatively more conventional life. But the door is left open for future adventures should Ethan Sacks or someone else want to resurrect the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Star Wars: Crimson Reign (2021) #1

Dec 11, 2021

I also liked the foreshadowing that Qi'ra's Crimson Reign is going to end in tragedy. As to how it will all play out remains to be seen. But if this opener is anything to go by. S### is going to kick off.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Crimson Reign (2021) #2

Feb 6, 2022

It is a fairly strong outing with a few moving parts that will eventually feed into a bigger story. I can't wait to find out the full scope of things.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Crimson Reign (2021) #3

Mar 14, 2022

A really strong story, which gives us a backstory for The Archivist, but also makes subtle mention of Qi'ra's past association with Darth Maul. I can't wait to see where this story goes as we get closer to that final book.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars: Crimson Reign (2021) #4

May 1, 2022

OverallAnother great issue that expands on what we know about The Knights of Ren, which is something we really should have gotten from the sequel trilogy. Maybe these guys will get a comic book spin-off on the strength of this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Crimson Reign (2021) #5

Jun 27, 2022

OverallThis issue brings to an end the Crimson Reighn storyline, but it isn't the end of the story. That is yet to come in a new mini-series that will be called The Hidden Empire. And of course, we'll be subscribing to it. Or at least trying to cover every issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars: Ewoks (2024) #1

Oct 15, 2024

If you are a fan of the Ewoks from Return of the Jedi and want to learn more about them. Then this book is for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Ewoks (2024) #2

Nov 19, 2024

Steve Orlando and his creative team do a fantastic job building on the story from the last issue. I'm really enjoying seeing Wicket's character get more development, and I love the addition of a former Scout Trooper from the Battle of Endor among the villains. It adds an interesting dynamic as they scheme to exploit the Ewoks to reach the weapons cache left behind by Moff Adelhard. I can't wait to see how things unfold in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars: Han Solo #3

Sep 1, 2016

I really look forward to learning about Han's old friend in issue 4.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Han Solo & Chewbacca (2022) #1

Mar 14, 2022

This first issue ends on a bit of a fun note where Han meets up with an old man in a bar. This final moment of the opening issue will have fans guessing for at least a month. Is this guy Han's father? Or is he someone else entirely.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Han Solo & Chewbacca (2022) #2

May 22, 2022

Overall. This is a lot of fun and I look forward to seeing how our anti-heroes manage to get out of this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Han Solo & Chewbacca (2022) #3

Jul 5, 2022

Marc Guggenheim's heist story continues to tick along at a nice pace. And we even get a few blink and you'll miss them guest turns from Lady Qi'ra and The Archivist as this issue ties in to events in the recently concluded Crimson Reign storyline.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Han Solo & Chewbacca (2022) #4

Jul 26, 2022

A really fun issue to read, which has a cliffhanger ending that will keep fans on the edge of their seats until the next issue arrives.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Han Solo & Chewbacca (2022) #5

Aug 14, 2022

A really fun issue that leaves us with a cliffhanger that would make the old Flash Gordon movie serials from the 1930s and 40s blush.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Han Solo & Chewbacca (2022) #6

Oct 4, 2022

This was a great issue, which allowed for the introduction of quite a few characters from elsewhere in the Star Wars universe. I really enjoyed how Tonga was used. But the introduction of Maz Kanata is probably the one that your more mainstream fans will latch onto.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Han Solo & Chewbacca (2022) #7

Nov 28, 2022

Overall this has been loads of fun and I can't wait to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Han Solo & Chewbacca (2022) #8

Jan 2, 2023

After having had several issues where Han and Chewie have been separated. It is somewhat of a relief to see the team back together again as the two characters really do compliment each other. The addition of Thaedra to the mix made for a little fun as well. Especially given that it means that Han is the one that is having to follow and not lead.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Han Solo & Chewbacca (2022) #9

Jan 28, 2023

This was a solid issue, which sees the story building towards an exciting conclusion. The use of Ajax Sigma throws an interesting twist in the plot as it may well tie into the Hidden Empire series. I also love how Marshall Vancto and Han's father are working together as we all know that the arrangement they have isn't likely to end well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Han Solo & Chewbacca (2022) #10

Mar 12, 2023

Meanwhile, Chewbacca and Khel have been captured by Marshall Buck Vancto. But thanks to a deal that Chewie strikes with the Marshall. He and Solo are allowed to go free.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Hidden Empire (2022) #1

Nov 22, 2022

A really strong start, which ends on a great cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Hidden Empire (2022) #2

Dec 12, 2022

This second issue really develops the story and leaves us with a fantastic cliffhanger. We also see Lady Qi'ra's ruthless side come out again when Cadeliah questions her about the plan. Qi'ra pretty much says that she is prepared to let Crimson Dawn die if it sees her fulfill her mission.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Hidden Empire (2022) #3

Feb 14, 2023

OverallThis is very much a story within a story. The rescue of the archivist was necessary as she is Qi'ra's best ally in her bid to bring the Empire down. But it is Channath Cha's personal story and her hunger for revenge that makes this issue so good. And it is bookended brilliantly at the close of the issue where Qi'ra explains to Cadeliah that Channath Cha's story is now a part of her story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Hidden Empire (2022) #5

Apr 11, 2023

Hopefully Marvel releases this trilogy in one big volume because I for one would leap at the chance of owning that.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Wars: Hyperspace Stories (2022) #1

Aug 28, 2022

The StoryWhile on a diplomatic mission with Senator Yaru from Kashyyyk Senator Amidala and the Wookie diplomat are kidnapped by the Seperatist. However, Yaru is able to hide his young daughter before Grievous's battle droids are able to catch her. Hearing the news. The Jedi Council dispatch Obi-Wan Kenobi and his apprentice Anakin Skywalker to launch a rescue mission. As they arrive on the planet. Obi-Wan and Anakin find Yaru's young daughter who leads them to where the separatist took her father and Senator Amidala.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Star Wars: Hyperspace Stories (2022) #2

Sep 27, 2022

While I wasn't overly impressed with the artwork for this. I did enjoy the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars: Hyperspace Stories (2022) #3

Dec 5, 2022

This was a fun book that I really enjoyed. I love Poe Dameron's attitude of what could possibly go wrong. Which is usually followed up with stuff going epically wrong.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Mace Windu (2024) #1

Feb 10, 2024

I look forward to seeing how this story unfolds in the months ahead.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Mace Windu (2024) #3

Apr 23, 2024

Overall a fun book that continues to show us a really interesting character in the form of Azita Cruuz who is not necessarily on anyone's side but her own. I can't wait to see how this story concludes in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Mace Windu (2024) #4

May 21, 2024

The StoryAs they prepare to leave so that Mace can return to the Jedi Order with a new fuel source Mace and Azita Cruuz come face to face with The Shroud's leader. Mace and the leader fight a duel where it soon becomes apparent that the Shroud leader has received Jedi training. Soon he taunts Windu with his knowledge of the force claiming that there is no light or dark side. There is only power.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Obi-Wan (2022) #1

May 29, 2022

This idea of Kenobi looking back to key moments from his younger life is a fun way of showing us what the younger and less experience Obi-Wan was like in a time before he became a full Jedi. I can't wait for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Obi-Wan (2022) #2

Jul 5, 2022

A really fun story that sees the young Obi-Wan tested.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Obi-Wan (2022) #3

Aug 2, 2022

The description of the battle is done brilliantly. I particularly liked how Commander Mekedrox seemed to rile Obi-Wan a little bit for treating the battle like it was just a mere game. The orders being given back and forth and the general panic and mayhem of being outnumbered by a superior force is brilliantly captured.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Obi-Wan (2022) #4

Sep 6, 2022

The StoryWith the storm starting to hit his home on Tatooine. Obi-Wan thinks back to another mission in which he was ordered to hunt down and kill Commander Mekedrox who had gone rogue. The veteran Jedi recounts how the event affected both himself and Anakin. He reflects on how so much death and war can take their toll on a person and tells of how he and Anakin tried to talk Mekedrox back from the ragged edge.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Obi-Wan (2022) #5

Sep 18, 2022

This last issue was a nice way to finish off the series and is a great setup to read just before watching A New Hope. I loved the ominous closing panel where we see old Ben's clothes bundled on the floor and Darth Vader's black boots standing on them. It is a chilling reminder of what is to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Revelations (2022) #1

Nov 27, 2022

I really enjoyed this first issue and can't wait to read more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Star Wars: The High Republic (2021) #1

Jan 11, 2021

To sum up, this isn't a bad story. But it's not the best thing have read either. The character of Keeve feels like your stereotypical girl next door. Nothing really stands out about her other than her Jedi stuff. I can't really see her becoming as popular or as liked as an Ahsoka Tanu for example. But maybe I am being a bit unfair. I feel it was a bit of a mistake having her pass her Jedi Trails so fast. It may have been better to have introduced her at an earlier stage in her Jedi training. Much like how Ahsoka is introduced to us in the Clone Wars movie.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Star Wars: The High Republic (2021) #2

Feb 9, 2021

Overall though. I'm still not especially invested in this story or these characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Star Wars: The High Republic (2021) #3

Mar 7, 2021

Overall. I'm probably going to stick with this comic until it concludes. But for time being. I am not being wowed by anything that ‘The High Republic' has to offer. It feels very much like a poor man's version of ‘Knights of the Old Republic'. Quite frankly. I'm getting rather bored of this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Star Wars: The High Republic (2021) #4

Apr 12, 2021

OverallThis story continues to be a very hit-and-miss affair with me. To a point where I am quite glad that this is the penultimate issue because it means I only have one left to read. The plot twist with Sskar being able to fend off the influence of the Drenger was pretty obvious. I sort of saw it coming right away. Overall on its own merit. This is not a bad issue. It just that the overall story just has not been doing it for me.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: The Mandalorian #1

Jul 14, 2022

This first issue of The Mandalorian is pretty much a word-for-word reproduction of what we saw in the series. But what makes it interesting is the somewhat different visual perspective that the book's artists brings to the table. For example, in the panels that reproduce Djinn Djarins meeting with his imperial employer. The artist manages to make the stormtroopers look a tad more banged up and worse for wear than they were in the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars: The Mandalorian: Season 2 #1

Jun 30, 2023

Overall. I enjoyed this and look forward to seeing what Barnes and Jeanty do with the next chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Star Wars: The Mandalorian: Season 2 #2

Jul 31, 2023

This continues to be a faithful adaptation of the hit Disney + TV series, which brought many older fans back to the Star Wars universe and I look forward to the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: The Mandalorian #2

Aug 21, 2022

Overall this issue picks up the story from the first issue brilliantly well and reminds me of what a great first season we had when it comes to the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Star Wars: The Mandalorian: Season 2 #3

Sep 7, 2023

Rodney Barnes continues to do a solid job of adapting the second season to comics. The Heiress is definitely one of the more memorable episodes from the second season of The Mandalorian as it introduced us to Bo-Katan who up until that point had only been seen in the Star Wars: Clone Wars and Star Wars: Rebels animated shows. I think the writer and artist of this comic do a solid job of adapting this key episode to The Mandalorian TV series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: The Mandalorian #3

Sep 26, 2022

Rodney Barnes remains faithful to the story from the show's first season and is producing a fairly entertaining comic book adaptation. Where this book really shines is the artwork. It is quite interesting and fun to see an artist's alternative take on many of the scenes that we all probably know by heart by now. At least I do. As have probably watched the first season a good three or four times by now. Overall this is another solid issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: The Mandalorian #4

Oct 11, 2022

This is a pretty faithful adaptation of the episode, which was appropriately called Sanctuary. I loved how well handled the various conversations were. In fact, I actually forgot about how much detail was in Cara Dune's initial conversation with The Mandalorian. I also forgot about the bit of conversation that Din Djarin has with The Child as they land on the planet. So reading these comic adaptations are reminding me of moments from the series, but also adds a bit more of a twist to them as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: The Mandalorian #5

Nov 8, 2022

I really enjoyed this issue and look forward to seeing how well the team behind this book does with the next one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: The Mandalorian: Season 2 #5

Oct 17, 2023

Rodney Barnes continues to do a fairly solid job of adapting the TV series to comics and seems to be getting it right. This episode in particular was a key story in the second season of Mandalorian as it introduced us to the live-action version of Ahsoka, but it also builds up to Din Djarin's first meeting with Boba Fett. Added to that. The story also introduces Morgan Elsbeth who later gets a prominent role in the Ahsoka series, which just finished its run a few weeks back.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: The Mandalorian #6

Dec 21, 2022

Rodney Barnes another chapter that stays quite faithful to the episode. However, the book continues to give us a slightly different take on the episodes with the comics' different take on the visuals, which is always interesting to see.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: The Mandalorian: Season 2 #6

Nov 21, 2023

The Tragedy! was the 14th chapter of the series and one of the best episodes of the show. I think Rodney Barnes does a great job with the writing of this and manages to capture the friendship between Din Djarin and Grogu really well. I particularly enjoyed how well handled the conversation was between The Mandalorian and Grogu at the start of the issue as they are coming in to land on Tython. I also enjoyed the stand-off between Din Djarin and Bob Fett and its eventual resolution.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: The Mandalorian #7

Jan 31, 2023

A solid outing that has me excited to see what this creative team does with the final issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Star Wars: The Mandalorian: Season 2 #7

Dec 31, 2023

A really strong issue, which builds perfectly to next month's issue, which will be the season two finale.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: The Mandalorian: Season 2 #8

Jan 17, 2024

It will be interesting to see how this team does with Book of Boba Fett if indeed an adaptation of that is on the way. I think one is likely given that the last three episodes of this Boba Fett show were Mandalorian episodes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: The Mandalorian #8

Mar 7, 2023

Overall this has been a pretty faithful adaptation of the TV show's first season and it's been fun seeing things from a slightly different perspective. Especially when it comes to the visual side of things. As far as the story goes. Rodney Barnes stayed fairly true to the events that we saw in the series. And doesn't really deviate or add very much to the story. Instead, he takes the safer route of remaining very true to the story, which is understandable given how precious we fans can be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Yoda (2022) #1

Nov 29, 2022

I'm not looking forward to more of this story so I can get a better idea of where it is going. I suspect that Yoda has other reasons for staying behind on Turrak.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Yoda (2022) #2

Dec 31, 2022

Cavan Scott writes a solid second issue that builds nicely on the characters and situations that were set up in the opening issue. I really enjoyed seeing that not every member of the Scalvi was enamored with Yoda and his stories. In fact, the conflict between Bree and Trikk makes this a more interesting story. Especially given what we learn by the close of the issue, which we'll learn more about in next month's issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Yoda (2022) #3

Jan 30, 2023

This issue wraps up the story of the Scalvi rather neatly. I loved how Bree eventually figured out what the issue was with the Crulkon and why they'd been raiding their island. I also quite liked the quiet way in which Yoda seemed to try and guide him to that conclusion. Hopefully, the next story arc is as good if not better than this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Star Wars: Yoda (2022) #4

Feb 26, 2023

Jody Houser does a great job of this issue and captures Dooku's voice so well that when I was reading the book. I could hear the dialogue being spoken by the Late Christopher Lee in my head. I also quite enjoyed that we are seeing the start of Dooku's descent to the Dark Side in this book. The panel where he tells the Wookiee not to tell anyone about his visions is a great setup. I can't wait to see how it plays out

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Yoda (2022) #5

Mar 21, 2023

Jody Houser is putting together an interesting story in which we see Krrshish struggle with his fear and anxiety surrounding his visions and his concerns about his Trandoshan friend. The dialogue between the Wookie and Yoda is well-handled and consistent with the way that Yoda speaks.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Yoda (2022) #6

Apr 29, 2023

Jody Houser concludes yet another fantastic character-driven story. I loved how Krrshish's dark visions were discussed between Yoda and Dooku and thought the dialogue between the two characters was fantastic. As always Houser demonstrates her knowledge of the franchises that she writes for and demonstrates her brilliant ability for capturing the character voices so brilliantly.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Yoda (2022) #7

May 12, 2023

A great first chapter to what will hopefully turn into a brilliant story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Star Wars: Yoda (2022) #8

Jun 30, 2023

Overall. I can't wait to see how all of this is going to play out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Star Wars: Yoda (2022) #9

Jul 14, 2023

We also get some great artwork at the end of the issue when it is revealed who it is that's been trying to contact Yoda in the present.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Star Wars: Yoda (2022) #10

Aug 12, 2023

The StoryHaving looked back over his time with the Jedi Council in previous issues. Yoda comes crashing back to the present for a visit from the Force Ghost of Obi-Wan Kenobi. Yoda is still having bad dreams about the consequences of both his actions and inactions. As he wakes from one of these dreams he finds that Obi-Wan is still sitting in his home waiting. Yoda goes outside to gather some herbs for some soup, but Obi-Wan follows and escorts the old Jedi to the entrance to the cave of evil. Yoda has one more lesson to learn before he is ready to teach a new apprentice.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Starfinder: Angels of the Drift #1

Jun 27, 2023

This first issue is very much set up. But I am hoping that it is set up for a regular comic book adaptation of the game's universe. So hopefully this is a success for the folks at Dynamite.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Starfinder: Angels of the Drift #2

Sep 3, 2023

I have never played the tabletop game that this story and its characters are based on. I can't really comment as to how true it is the the worlds within the game or the different character classes. But the mere fact that Quig gets resurrected by the ship's healer is definitely worth the roll of a D20.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Starfinder: Angels of the Drift #3

Oct 30, 2023

Starfinder is proving to be one of the comics that I most look forward to each month and I can't wait to see how this group of characters manage to escape and continue their adventures and what their next argument will be about.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Storm (2024) #1

Oct 9, 2024

OverallA solid first issue that seems to be setting up an interesting storyline that will challenge both the characters and readers. I love the fact that this is set in a world where the public has finally accepted Mutants and is no longer as fearful as they once more. Hence why Storm's decision is such a difficult one for her to make. I look forward to the next issue of this to see how the cards are dealt.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Storm (2024) #2

Nov 27, 2024

Overall, this was a strong issue that sets up plenty to look forward to in issue three when it hits stores next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Storm (2024) #3

Dec 14, 2024

Overall, it was an okay issuenot bad, but not particularly memorable either. Hopefully, issue four delivers something more impactful.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Strange Adventures (2020) #1

Mar 8, 2020

OverallTom King is giving us the beginnings of what could well be an epic story here. If this first chapter is anything to go by. We could wind up seeing a story that examines the nature of truth. The comic also looks like it is looking to examine the traditional true blue heroes like Adam Strange, who is similar to Flash Gordon in that he espouses very traditional values and has a bit of a black and white view of right and wrong, a lense, which suspect is going to get smashed as we see shades of grey coming through. I'm really enjoying the fact that the media is turning on Adam Strange in this first issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Strange Adventures (2020) #2

Jun 21, 2020

Overall. Not a bad issue. But a bit more action would have been nice.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Strange Adventures (2020) #3

Jul 28, 2020

It would be fantastic to see something happen with regard to pacing in the next issue, but if its anything like this issue. I'm probably going to drop this book from my list. At the moment this feels like more of an art book, which is great. But a few more reveals in regards to where the story is actually going would be great.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Strange Adventures (2020) #4

Aug 5, 2020

Hopefully, we'll get a few more answers in the next issue as to what really happened during this war. Was Adam Strange manipulated by Rann's government or was he a willing participant in the war?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Strange Adventures (2020) #5

Sep 10, 2020

OverallAnother strong issue, which uncovers more of the political machinations that are happening in the background. You find yourself not entirely sure who is in the right. Adam Strange and his wife or The Justice League? Is the Pykkt invasion of Earth being entirely manufactured or is it a very real danger?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Strange Adventures (2020) #6

Oct 20, 2020

OverallThis was a pretty good issue overall. I liked the whole conversation between Mr. Terriffic and Allanna and how that was all juxtaposed with the flashback sequences. If there is one small criticism it would be that six issues in and we are still waiting for something big to happen on the Earth. You know like the Pykkt invasion that the writer is teasing us with.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Strange Adventures (2020) #7

Dec 8, 2020

This is a brilliant setup for the next issue, which promises to have tons of action.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Strange Adventures (2020) #8

Feb 1, 2021

Additionally, the sequence in Phoenix where The Flash goes looking for survivors is well handled. And gives us an idea of how aggressive and how hard the Pykkts are prepared to fight. It also has you wondering if Batman and the Justice League have perhaps bitten off more than they can chew.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Strange Adventures (2020) #9

Apr 5, 2021

This issue pretty much sees the fallout from Batman's investigation into Adam Strange and it with brilliant how writer Tom King handles the talking heads on the news. The whole comic is pretty much a clever comment on public opinion and how it can be manipulated by the media. Alanna's speech on the news shows that she appears on felt rather Trumpian in its approach to acknowledging that there was truth in the allegations made toward Adam Strange. Indeed, she absolutely goes all out in selling Adam Strange's actions as those of a war hero. Rhetorically asking the audience if they want someone that will win by punishing the enemy. Or if they want the JLA who will fight by the rules. It's a reminder that war is not civilized.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Strange Adventures (2020) #10

May 31, 2021

The StoryEarth is losing the war against the Pykkts. But, no one understands why. Especially given that Adam Strange and his soldiers had defeated the Pykkts on Rann. When Allanna Strange receives a mysterious letter. We finally get to grips with the shocking truth of the matter. Adam Strange lied about his heroics. A deal was struck and Earth was the prize. But there was so much more to it than that. After all. War is hell.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Strange Adventures (2020) #11

Aug 3, 2021

This penultimate issue ends on a somewhat unexpected note and sets a lot up for the final issue that will be out next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Strange Adventures (2020) #12

Oct 24, 2021

Tom King concludes his story brilliantly by sort of bringing things full circle by ending the book with the same image that started it all 12 issues ago. A flashback of Adam Strange signing his book. It's a bittersweet ending to a book that has deconstructed a hero and shown that not everything is black and white.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Stranger Things: Tomb of Ybwen #1

Oct 3, 2021

Tomb of Ybwen is off to a solid start here. And I look forward to reading the second issue when it gets released later this month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Stranger Things: Science Camp #1

Oct 3, 2020

Overall. This is a brilliant start to what looks like a story that may be paying some homage to The Friday the 13th Movies, but done in the style of ‘Stranger Things'.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Stranger Things: Into the Fire #1

Jan 14, 2020

Writer Jody Houser has hit on a great formula here as she explores elements from 'Stranger Things' second season and expands on them by making use of 8 and introducing us to some newer characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Stranger Things: Kamchatka #1

Mar 28, 2022

Overall. I'm invested enough in Kamchatka to go the full distance as it is a nice follow-on from the last mini-series, but from an alternate perspective.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Stranger Things: Tomb of Ybwen #2

Oct 31, 2021

The Tomb of Ybwen is probably the closest you'll get right now to another season of Stranger Things. Well, at least until we get season 4 at some stage in 2022.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Stranger Things: Into the Fire #2

Feb 16, 2020

I'm looking forward to seeing what Jody Houser comes up with for issue 3.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Stranger Things: Science Camp #2

Oct 31, 2020

Overall. A great second issue, which sets up the mystery and adventure we'll get to see in the next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Stranger Things: Into the Fire #3

Mar 31, 2020

Each issue of this book has been a real treat for those like myself who enjoy exploring the mythology of television shows that little bit further. The addition of Ryan and Marcy to the overall ‘Stranger Things' storyline has enriched my enjoyment of the series a little more. Overall. A great ongoing mini-series, which I will be sorry to see the end of.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Stranger Things: Science Camp #3

Dec 1, 2020

The story continues to feel like a chapter of Stranger Things, that could have happened between series. I'm really looking forward to seeing how Dustin and Suzie go about tracking down the camps killer while managing to avoid getting into strife.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Stranger Things: Tomb of Ybwen #3

Nov 29, 2021

Given how this issue ends. I'm really looking forward to the final issue, which will drop on December 29.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Stranger Things: Tomb of Ybwen #4

Jan 3, 2022

A very fitting end to what has really been a fun story about Will's personal loss and the fellowship that he has with his friends. As said above. The highlight of this issue is Newby's letter to the treasure hunters. A letter, which could well have been written for Will and the boys. Given that they had that same adventurous spirit and curiosity that Newby had.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Stranger Things: Science Camp #4

Jan 3, 2021

Overall. A good conclusion to what has been a fun story. But I'd have preferred it be less scooby do.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Stranger Things: Into the Fire #4

Jul 13, 2020

Overall. A great end to what has been a solid story, which included some nice appearances from a number of characters from the shows second season.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Stranger Things: Halloween Special #1

Oct 25, 2020

A really fun book, which will no doubt make people feel nostalgic for Halloweens of years gone by.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Stranger Things and Dungeons & Dragons #1

Nov 9, 2020

OverallWriters Jody Houser and Jim Zub do a brilliant job of giving us the further adventures of Mike, Lucas, Will and Dustin as they learn to understand the world through D&D. I love how well written the accidental discovery of the game was. Additionally, the writing team does a brilliant job of capturing the playful banter that the group has. In Particular, Dustin's introduction was handled very well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Stranger Things and Dungeons & Dragons #2

Dec 7, 2020

Overall. A really enjoyable issue that explores some aspects of the characters that we may not see in the actual TV show.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Stranger Things and Dungeons & Dragons #3

Jan 12, 2021

I also loved how Mike was going all out to impress El by being as chivalrous as he could during the game.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Stranger Things and Dungeons & Dragons #4

Feb 21, 2021

This is a great four-issue story arc to fill the gap that has been left by the delay to season 5 of the series, which I hope we get to see at some point later this year.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Suicide Squad: War Crimes Special #1

Sep 3, 2016

All in all this first issue serves as a fairly good jump on point for anyone wanting to check out 'Suicide Squad', but it will not blow away those that have read the previous incarnations of this comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Tales From The Dark Multiverse: The Judas Contract #1

Dec 19, 2019

This was a fun read and was definitely one of the darker stories from this series, but it also felt rather rushed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Tales From The Dark Multiverse: Infinite Crisis #1

Dec 2, 2019

OverallJames Tynion IVgives us a really cool story here. Reading how Ted Kord aka Blue Beetle slowly loses his sense of humanity and morality to the computer nanites that have merged with him was an intriguing journey. I felt the heartbreak when the computer virus inadvertently kills Booster Gold in order to protect its host. The Blue Beetle. This is a story full of very difficult and trying moments.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Tales From The Dark Multiverse: Blackest Night #1

Nov 25, 2019

It also has one of the darkest endings for this Dark Multiverse series to date, but it's also a fun one if you are a fan of Lobo.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Tales From The Dark Multiverse: The Death of Superman #1

Nov 20, 2019

OverallThis was an enjoyable read and an interesting look at what happens when an idealist like Lois Lane is suddenly given god-like powers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Tales From The Dark Multiverse: Batman: Knightfall #1

Nov 19, 2019

As far as this tale goes. It ends on an absolute shocker where we get to see what 30 " years of suffering have done to the mind of Bruce Wayne. I am hoping that all the various stories will come together toward the end of the run, but I really look forward to seeing Batman break bad.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Tank Girl (2018) #1

Dec 18, 2018

OverallFans of the Tank Girl comics will likely really love this given that the dialogue and the action are as anarchic as I remember. The dialogue, which is written by Alan Martin is as fast and loose as you'd expect for a Tank Girl comic and yes a lot of the humor is rather crude but a lot of fun if you are a fan of off the wall toilet humor.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Tarot (2020) #1

Jan 5, 2020

A solid first issue, which leaves us with an interesting cliffhanger, which could well lead to us seeing The Defenders facing off against Earth's mightiest heroes in the new issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Tarot (2020) #2

Feb 2, 2020

OverallAlan Davis has put together what is turning out to be a really enjoyable story. I'm kind of liking the juxtaposition of Science Versus Magic and the element of altered events being brought into play. For example, Namor's memory of the second world war with Captain America seemed to have been altered in the last issue, but is now as it was originally or is it? I also rather enjoyed the brief cameos from Spider-man, Daredevil, and The Fantastic Four and hope that they get brought into the story a little by the time the next issue comes around.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Tarot (2020) #3

Mar 1, 2020

OverallThis comic book continues to be a ton of fun and is proving to be rather fun to follow given how much strangeness is going on. In short. Alan Davis has given us a story that has more twists and turns than a Rubics Cube.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Tarot (2020) #4

Mar 29, 2020

OverallAlan Davis weaves a complex and simple story and ties off most of the loose ends by the end of the issue. Accept we never really get to know what happened to Diablo who mysteriously disappears midway through issue after having been a consistent nuisance. The issue ends very much as the story started with Captain America and Namor in Occupied France during the second world war, but this time everything is normal except for a hint of dj vu from the Cap.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Tekken #1

May 2, 2017

It was a quick read and I was left caring enough for the characters to want to know what will happen next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The After Realm Quarterly #1

Feb 10, 2020

I'm definitely in for the long haul on this one and look forward to the second quarter when issue two will be unleashed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
The After Realm Quarterly #2

Jun 22, 2020

An awesome second issue, which builds on the story and sets things up beautifully for Oona's further adventures as she learns more about herself and explores the nine realms in her search. I loved the use of mythology and the playful dialogue between Oona and Pooka her Fairie Goat. I also loved that her being able to trick Loki didn't mean the end of the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Collector: Unit 731 #1

Apr 25, 2022

I've always been fascinated with immortal or long-lived characters as seen in shows such as Highlander and the short-lived NBC series Forever. As they are a cool plot device to explore bite-sized bits of history with. And while this is neither Highlander or Forever. I'm really looking forward to reading more of this story as it evolves over the next few issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Collector: Unit 731 #2

May 31, 2022

Rod Monteiro and Will Conrad continue to deliver an intriguing story. I quite enjoyed how James gets the virus out of his system and his fellow prisoner's reaction to it. Furthermore, the characterization of Dr. Shuzen makes for a really compelling villain, but I can't help but wonder if there is someone bigger behind these experiments in Unit 731.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Collector: Unit 731 #3

Jun 29, 2022

We get left off with a great cliffhanger in this issue, which is likely to keep me on the edge of my seat for close to a month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Collector: Unit 731 #4

Aug 2, 2022

This was a really fun read with some stunning artwork that gave it a cinematic quality that put me in mind of some of the old war movies that my late father would watch on the television.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Death-Defying Devil (2019) #1

Aug 5, 2019

Overall. A strong opening issue, which has me hooked in for issue 2.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Death-Defying Devil (2019) #2

Sep 4, 2019

I look forward to seeing where all of this will lead in the next issue. I have to wonder if Death-Defying Devil will wind up in a chariot race in a Hollywood epic similar to the classic Ben Hur next. Am really excited by some of the possibilities of this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #1

Aug 8, 2020

Overall. A really strong beginning to what will hopefully be a story that improves with every issue. I really enjoyed how Lindy's meeting with Shakespeare was handled, but also enjoyed how Ruin was written. I can't wait for more of this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #2

Sep 5, 2020

G. Willow Wilson continues to enthrall with what is a great storyline, which is beginning to present us with some fun plot twists. I loved the nod to Youtubers and Law of Attraction videos that she makes with the character of Heather After. It was very true of the many magical gurus that are out there on the web. So to see it used in a comic that is about dreams and nightmares makes perfect sense.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #3

Oct 14, 2020

I also love how the artists have created three different styles to represent the three different locations in the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #4

Nov 8, 2020

OverallThe Dreaming: Waking Hours continues to be a monthly treat. The story is lots of fun with some great twists and turns. In Lindy, we have a character who is easy to relate to as she tries to find the great almighty OZ. As in the real William Shakespeare. Lindy's journey into Shakespeare's world very much has the feeling of Alice going through the Looking Glass.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #5

Dec 6, 2020

G. Willow Wilson's journey into The Dreaming concludes as Lindy's story comes to an end, but it's only the beginning of Ruin's journey. I loved how this story arc concludes. The final conversation that Dream has with Ruin is both philosophical and truthful. In short, Ruin is given free roaming rights to pass between The Dreaming and Waking Worlds. Lord Dream has given him the license to go and find his true love. This gift comes with a warning. A warning that will make the future adventures of Ruin that be more interesting.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #6

Jan 10, 2021

Overall. This is a brilliant opening to a new story arc on The Dreaming, which picks up on a loose thread leftover from the last arc. I look forward to reading the next issue to see how all of this is going to pan out. Especially given the inclusion of a certain John Constantine in the final few pages. Will we see him fly to America to help save Heather After. Or will she have done enough on her own to allow her to fend off Puck?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #7

Feb 7, 2021

G. Willow Wilson continues to up the ante in regards to the story. Although I was quite surprised by how quickly Heather After was able to summon Auberon and get her deal with him set. But that said. I get the impression that we are in for some bigger twists as the story progresses. Especially given that Puck is still out there and still capable of causing a great deal of trouble.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #8

Mar 11, 2021

Overall. A really strong issue. I'm looking forward to seeing what Wilson and Robles will come up with for forthcoming issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #9

Apr 11, 2021

Back with the Unseelie. Heather After and Ruin have finally come to their senses but now face certain doom.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #10

May 19, 2021

I also quite enjoyed the final few pages where Ruin begins to realize his powers and takes on the Kingmaker in the Dreaming. It will be interesting to see how all of this will play out in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #11

Jun 27, 2021

The Dreaming continues to bring an animated cinematic feel to the stories of Ruin and his friends as they try to put the world to rights. This is a comic book series that is just waiting to be made into an animated series or an epic fantasy movie.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Dreaming: Waking Hours (2020) #12

Aug 8, 2021

Waking Hours comes to a conclusion with a somewhat happy ending for Ruin, but I would not be surprised if the writer or another writer decides to pick at a few of the remaining threads. Especially given that Heather After has paid quite a high price for Ruins happiness. It's only a matter of time before that debt comes due.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
The Dresden Files: Dog Men #1

Jun 9, 2017

Mark Powers has found the voice of Harry Dresden really well in this book. So much so that I have to wonder if he was able to call Jim Butcher up for help. The art work by Diego Galindois fantastic. I especially loved his splash page of the Wolfman that attached the Martineaux family.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
The Dresden Files: Dog Men #2

Jul 10, 2017

Writer Mark Powers continues to get the voice of the characters bang on from what I know of them from the Jim Butcher books.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Dresden Files: Dog Men #3

Aug 2, 2017

The issue closes with an appropriate cliffhanger, but given what you'll witness in the pages leading up to it. You'll likely wonder how long it will take for the Government types to realise that their mission is futile.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
The Dresden Files: Dog Men #4

Sep 7, 2017

I continue to enjoy this story and will most likely treat myself to the trade paperback when it comes out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Dresden Files: Dog Men #5

Oct 10, 2017

Mark Powers grasp of Dresden's universe and the dialogue continues to impress. The book is riddled with references to pop culture films and the Star Wars and Indiana Jones references come thick and fast. I loved that Dresden thinks of his battered VW Beetle in same was as Han Solo thinks of the Millenium Falcon.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Dresden Files: Dog Men #6

Nov 14, 2017

overall. This is a solid conclusion to what has been a fun Dresden Files story. Hopefully, we'll see more Dresden work from this creative team in the future. It's been a fun ride.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The End (2020): Captain America #1

Feb 9, 2020

This is a worthwhile book, which entertains and has an inspiring message that I think most people will be able to get behind.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
The End (2020): Doctor Strange #1

Feb 8, 2020

I think at the end of the day. This story relies heavily on the reader actually knowing a bit about the world of Doctor Strange, which kind of works against it a little bit.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Good Asian #1

May 12, 2021

Overall. This first issue of ‘The Good Asian' sets the world and story up brilliantly. I was left wanting to know what was coming next. I also appreciated the addition of the writer's notes and observation on the last couple of pages, which filled you in on a little of the history that the book is grounded in.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Good Asian #2

Jun 14, 2021

Much like last month. Writer Pornsak Pichetshote writes a bit of a closing editorial in which he talks about the conditions that the Chinese lived in during the early part of the 20th century when this book is set. It's truly eye-opening to read about this and Pichetshote gives a brilliant commentary about it. Being that I was born and raised in the UK. I have very little knowledge of American History. So this is sort of a bit of education insofar as hearing a Chinese Perspective on this particular point in history. Whereas most hard-boiled Noir Detective stories are very much from a Western perspective.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Good Asian #3

Jul 14, 2021

Overall. Another great issue with some wonderful and insightful historical notes at the end. I'll definitely be buying myself a hard copy of the trade if this gets released as a collection.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Good Asian #4

Aug 11, 2021

The Good Asian continues to provide a gritty story about the Asian experience in one of America's toughest eras for Chinese Americans. I'd love to see this book adapted into an HBO series or even a movie.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Good Asian #5

Oct 9, 2021

The Good Asian continues to present a wonderful Detective Noir story with some great plot twists. Pornsak Pichetshote gives us a truly complex character in Edison Hark. The panels set in the bar where Wilber tells Edison to sort of play along with things to earn the trust of an all-white police force are revealing of the time period. We get some wonderful shocks and twists in this book, which will only make the story more interesting as the plot moves forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Good Asian #6

Nov 10, 2021

A really strong issue that offers up a fantastic plot twist.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Good Asian #7

Dec 14, 2021

The final shoot-out at the end of the comic is fantastic. It's almost as if the art team has pulled the pin on a grenade that has been simmering for ages.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Good Asian #8

Jan 15, 2022

This is a pretty big issue with some fairly big reveals that will no doubt help to resolve the story over the next two issues. I can't wait to read them.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Good Asian #9

Mar 16, 2022

Overall. A brilliant book, which is sure will give us plenty more twists and turns in next month's grand finale. Thank you Pornsak Pichetshote for writing this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Good Asian #10

Apr 26, 2022

A satisfying conclusion to what has been a wonderful story with a lot of fantastic plot twists. I'd love to see The Good Asian adapted to film or television as it is definitely something that I'd watch. If Pichetshote were allowed control of how it was adapted to screen.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Greatest Adventure #1

Apr 11, 2017

I love the old straight ahead style of story telling that Burroughs and his contemporaries were known for and Willingham despite the heavy handedness with exposition has captured some of the spirit.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
The Greatest Adventure #2

May 9, 2017

Over all this second issue was an improvement over the opening issue, which got bogged down a bit in the task of introducing all the characters and setting the story up.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
The Greatest Adventure #3

Jun 20, 2017

Looking forward to the next issue to see how Willingham will bring Game Theory into the mix.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
The Greatest Adventure #4

Aug 10, 2017

The end of this issue is a real game changer and it does have me looking forward to the next issue in spite of my slight disappointment as the slow pace of this issue. Hopefully my excitement will be justified.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
The Greatest Adventure #5

Sep 1, 2017

Overall. This was a pretty decent issue despite some of its pitfalls and the meeting between Tarzan and John Carter was the icing on the cake.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Greatest Adventure #7

Nov 14, 2017

Overall. An exciting issue, which has a shock ending that will have you wondering if the news of a certain death is for real or just another plot twist?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Greatest Adventure #8

Dec 20, 2017

Cezar Razek's art shines once again, but I can't help but think that he was not as challenged by this issue as he has been with past issues. There wasn't a great deal of action to draw or any big dinosaurs or set pieces.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Greatest Adventure #9

Feb 8, 2018

Overall. This is a fantastic conclusion to what has been an exciting and fun 9 issue run with some of the most beloved characters from the worlds of Edgar Rice Burroughs. Although it has been difficult to keep track of all the characters at times. It's been fun nonetheless. This series has given us Dinosaurs, Mars and so much more. Dynamite will be hard pushed to top this one!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
The Librarians #2

Nov 16, 2017

Overall. While this issue was heavy on expositional information. It was done in a fun and entertaining way.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Librarians #3

Jan 10, 2018

Overall. A great issue. I can't wait for issue 4 and I hope that we'll continue to get new comic book adventures for The Librarians in the months to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Librarians #4

Mar 2, 2018

I highly recommendthis comic to all fans of the TV series and will be picking up a copy of the graphic novel when Dynamite decide to bundle it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Lonesome Hunters #1

Jun 28, 2022

The Lonesome Hunters gets off to a really strong start with an interesting backstory, which I suspect we may see more of in flashbacks. The art style is absolutely beautiful, but also quite eery in that there is almost a sepia-type quality to it. I particularly loved the sequence with the magpies and how that paid off.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Lonesome Hunters #2

Jul 31, 2022

This second issue of The Lonesome Hunters builds nicely on what was started in the first issue. We begin to see a bond form between Howard and Lupe. I really liked the introduction of Tina into the story and I am intrigued to learn just how much she knows about Howard and his past. Especially, given that she seemed to know about the Sword and Howard's past misadventures with it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Lonesome Hunters #3

Aug 30, 2022

A really strong issue with an ending that will keep you on the edge of your seat until you can get your mitts on the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Lonesome Hunters #4

Oct 2, 2022

The Lonesome Hunters is fast becoming one of my favorite comic book events of the year, which is quite funny because I'm not usually drawn to horror stories. However, the art style and this book's story is really something quite special.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
The Lost Fleet: Corsair #1

Jun 6, 2017

It be interesting to see how her relationship with Geary develops as the story progresses. It be especially interesting given that they were both on apposing sides of a war that went for over 100 years.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Magic Order: Vol. 2 #1

Oct 26, 2021

Mark Millar gets this second volume of The Magic Order off to a rip-roaring start as we see Victor Korne and his clan introduced in style. If the final few panels of this book are anything to go by. Then I'd say we are in for quite the ride as we see two magical families go toe to toe. Be warned though. This book is strictly for the more mature readers. Not for the kiddies.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Magic Order #1

Jun 12, 2018

This is a very strong first issue and Ireally hope Netflix make this one into a television series because it is definitelythe sort of thing that I'd watch.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Magic Order: Vol. 2 #2

Dec 1, 2021

This second issue of The Magic Order 2 was a little more sedate than last issue, but don't let that fool you because there is definitely an underlined tension to it. And the final few pages show us that Victor Korne is not to be underestimated.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
The Magic Order #2

Jul 17, 2018

This is a strong second issue that carries the story forward a little bit. My one slight criticism is the fact that we don't really know enough yet about the other Moonstones. But we do know why the murders are happening.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Magic Order #3

Aug 14, 2018

This is an exciting issue that leaves you wanting more. Definitelythe best issue to date on this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Magic Order: Vol. 2 #3

Jan 5, 2022

I loved the effort that when into revealing the backstory and I am really looking forward to seeing how these sequences turn out when this eventually gets made into a Netflix series or movie.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Magic Order #4

Oct 2, 2018

You can get hold of your own copy of ‘The Magic Order #4' on Wednesday 3 October, which happens to be tomorrow.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Magic Order: Vol. 2 #4

Feb 3, 2022

Mark Millar continues to spin a fun story in which Magic users become more like gunfighters from the wild west as they engage in a war to save all of humanity from the whims of Victor Korne. This is definitely a story that lends itself well to becoming a TV series or even a movie, and I can't wait to see that happen.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Magic Order V (2024) #1

Sep 29, 2024

This is a really strong start that ends on a great cliffhanger that will keep fans foaming at the mouth for an entire month until they learn about what has happened to Cordelia and who it is that is after her.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Magic Order V (2024) #2

Nov 4, 2024

A really solid second issue that sets up the plot really well. As we are likely going to see Cordelia get some karmic payback for her past experimentation with Black Magic. I look forward to seeing how it will all play out in the remaining issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Magic Order V (2024) #3

Dec 6, 2024

Overall, this is another stellar issue that leaves us with an exciting cliffhanger, keeping us all guessing until the next one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Midnite Show (2023) #1

Oct 8, 2023

Cullen Bunn kicks this story off in style and gets right to the throat. The concept of monsters coming into the real world from movie screens isn't a new one. But as I always say. It is how the writer frames the story that counts and Bunn frames his story really well. I'm quite looking forward to the second issue of this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
The Midnite Show (2023) #2

Nov 7, 2023

This second issue does a great job of building on the story and characters and making readers begin to become invested in them. I'm really enjoying the various exchanges between Abigail Jenner and the social media influencer who is recording absolutely everything and pretty much stalking the old stars.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Midnite Show (2023) #3

Dec 16, 2023

This third issue of The Midnite Show has everything set up for what could well be an epic finale in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Midnite Show (2023) #4

Jan 9, 2024

The artwork of the various monsters throughout the four issues has been fantastic fun and seeing a mash-up of so many monsters in one comic put me in mind of the old 1930s and 40s Universal Monster Movies. All that is missing from this story is a fictional comedy team based on Abbott and Costello.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Mummy #1

Nov 1, 2016

To sum up this opening issue is very well presented and even includes an article by Hammer Films expert Marcus Hearn who talks about the 1959 Hammer film on which this particular comic book series is based on. Five variant covers are available. All of which are great!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Orville #1

May 9, 2021

This is a strong start. I loved the recap of the end of season two and how it transitions and jumps five years into the future. 'Digressions' is written by David A. Goodman who is an executive producer and writer on the series. Seeing what happened in Kelly's timeline when she was returned is likely something they could have done in the series. Which hopefully is still returning. But seeing Kelly's timeline and the main characters on The Orville having taken a different path makes for a fun read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Orville: Heroes #2

Dec 9, 2020

David A. Goodman finishes off his story in a satisfying, but sad way. While it is satisfying to see the planet liberated and freed from the Nazh. It was sad that one character had to lose so much including their innocence in order to take over the job of saving her planet from Talla.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Orville #2

Jun 6, 2021

Given that we have had such a wait for season three of the show. This book is a rare treat indeed. It only makes me more excited for what we may see on the television series when it eventually returns.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Orville #3

Dec 1, 2020

A pretty good story with some nice moments. Sure, it borrows from 'Who Watches The Watchers' but deviates enough to make it fresh.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Prisoner (2018) #1

Apr 24, 2018

Overall. This is a really strong first issue and I am definately on the hook to see what this goes in future issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Raid (2018) #1

Aug 6, 2018

The Raid #1 is out now on both print and digital and is published by Titan Comics.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Rocketeer (2023): In The Den Of Thieves #1

Jul 17, 2023

I also loved the artwork seen when Cliff is on the studio lot looking for Betty at the beginning of the book. It's obvious that Messina did a bit of research in order to capture the fashions and various bits of technology from the period.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Rocketeer (2023): In The Den Of Thieves #2

Aug 28, 2023

The final couple of pages picks back up with Peevy as we see him put to work by the Nazis. I really look forward to seeing where this plot thread goes in the next few issues because we all know how clever and out-of-the-box Peevy can be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Rocketeer (2023): In The Den Of Thieves #3

Oct 7, 2023

Stephen Mooney delivers another fun issue that builds on the story and gives Betty a bigger role than she has had in previous stories as she goes on a mission with Cliff and really steps up. I look forward to seeing if Betty gets to build on this in the next issue as I'd love to see her be a more active player in future stories and be part of the action.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Rocketeer (2023): In The Den Of Thieves #4

Nov 18, 2023

Stephen Mooney does a solid job of bringing Den of Thieves to a satisfying conclusion and manages to give a bit of character growth to Cliff and Betty as we see them on a more equal footing. Overall this is a great ending for the story, but also a great foundation to build future adventures on.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Rocketeer (2023) #1

Jun 5, 2023

If like myself. You are a fan of The Rocketeer and the various spin-offs to it. Then you will likely really enjoy this one shot. I particularly enjoyed the Amelia Earhart story as well as the story that featured what might well have been Indiana Jones. Of course, he was not referenced as such in the story. As I am pretty sure that would have been somewhat awkward given that IDW at present does not have the license for that character. At least as far as we know. I wish someone would bring us an Indiana Jones comic though.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Rocketeer: The Great Race #1

Apr 12, 2022

Artist and writer Stephen Mooney does a brilliant job of capturing the visual vibe and spirit of the original Dave Stevens stories. The story is brilliantly pulpy as you'd expect and I'm looking forward to the next issue of this when it drops. As have gone to the trouble of pre-ordering all four. Still annoys the crap out of me that I cannot subscribe on Comixology anymore because of Amazon's massive screw-up when it comes to their UK customers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Rocketeer: The Great Race #2

May 10, 2022

Overall. A solid second issue that leaves us with an exciting cliffhanger to stew on until next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Rocketeer: The Great Race #3

Jun 13, 2022

I really liked how Cliff's friendship with Debbie was written and the somewhat awkward moment when Cliff learns that she is gay was fun because of the Awkwardness of the moment, which felt very much in keeping with the 1940s.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Rocketeer: The Great Race #4

Jul 24, 2022

Overall. These four issues make a great addition to my collection of books and comics about this particular character.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
The Sandman Universe: Dead Boy Detectives #1

Jan 3, 2023

I found this to be a really enjoyable book with some solid art, which while solid and good. Wasn't really my cup of tea. However, the story and dialogue more than made up for my indifference to the art style.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Sandman Universe: Dead Boy Detectives #2

Jan 26, 2023

Overall a solid second issue that sets a few things up for the third and final issue, which will hit next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Sandman Universe: Dead Boy Detectives #3

Mar 13, 2023

Pornsak Pichetshote's storytelling continues to be lots of fun. I loved the mythology he has added to this series about the difference between Western Ghosts and Thai Ghosts. Which proves to be somewhat of an important factor in this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
The Sandman Universe: Nightmare Country #1

Apr 19, 2022

Not a bad opening issue, but also not the greatest either as it kind of relies on readers already having some familiarity with The Sandman Universe. So not a great jumping-on point. The story throws you straight in by introducing us to Madison first. She is pretty much your typical young woman that is still dealing with a certain amount of PTSD from having been bullied mercilessly as a kid in school. She is very much a character that most readers will instantly relate to.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Sandman Universe: Nightmare Country #2

May 17, 2022

Overall. A really strong second issue, with a killer cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
The Six Million Dollar Man (2019) #1

Mar 5, 2019

Overall. A strong start, which takes Steve Austin in a slightly different direction than we have seen in previous comics and indeed the TV series itself.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Six Million Dollar Man (2019) #2

Apr 2, 2019

Overall. A solid second issue. Which ends with a fun and very dangerous twist.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
The Six Million Dollar Man (2019) #3

Apr 30, 2019

It was an okay issue. But I am hoping for more next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Six Million Dollar Man (2019) #4

Jun 3, 2019

Overall. A solid issue, which has an exciting cliffhanger that will keep us all hanging for an entire month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
The Six Million Dollar Man (2019) #5

Jul 9, 2019

A pretty solid story with lots of bionic breakdowns along the way, which is something we never saw a great deal of in the TV series other than on rare occasions where extreme cold clogged up Steve's Bionics.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
The Six Million Dollar Man: Fall of Man #3

Sep 7, 2016

All in all this reads like a glossier high budget episode of ‘The Six Million Dollar Man'. It is great as both anentertaining comic and a piece of 70s nostalgia. Great work! More please.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
The Six Million Dollar Man: Fall of Man #4

Nov 8, 2016

Dynamite have done a super job with this book and I hope we'll get to see more comics based on the original ‘Six Million Dollar Man' in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Six Million Dollar Man: Fall of Man #5

Dec 5, 2016

I bet that would have gone down real well in the 70's. Perhaps not.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Strain: Mister Quinlan - Vampire Hunter #1

Sep 21, 2016

The artwork by Edgar Salazar is pretty impressive. I loved the panels in which we saw the various vampire characters feeding because they were as graphic as you can get on the comic book page. I also liked his attention to detail with the various uniforms and weaponry of the roman centurions in the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Strain: Mister Quinlan - Vampire Hunter #2

Oct 24, 2016

With great writing and art work. This is a brilliant tie in to the series and gives us lots of insight into one of ‘The Strains' most loved, but most mysterious characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
The Strain: Mister Quinlan - Vampire Hunter #3

Nov 10, 2016

This is a comic book series that is the perfect partner to ‘The Strain' television series and I continue to look forward to each and every issue. Dark Horse have done some fantastic work on this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Strain: Mister Quinlan - Vampire Hunter #4

Dec 15, 2016

Dark Horse have done an awesome job with this series and I hope that we'll get to see more like it in the new year. Perhaps a few adventures with Abraham Setrakian during the 60s when he was hunting the strigoi on his own.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
The Strain: Mister Quinlan - Vampire Hunter #5

Jan 13, 2017

If you haven't read this mini series. Then I recommend you get the trade when it is released. This is a true extension of 'The Strain' series that fans will love. It will be well worth the investment.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
The Umbrella Academy: Hotel Oblivion: Hazel and Cha Cha Save Christmas #1

Dec 1, 2019

OverallScott Allie and Gerard Way have come up with a fun little Christmas story, which makes clever use of the two popular assassins from The Umbrella Academy comic book. The ongoing conversation between Cha Cha and Hazel about ghosts was a lot of fun as was the side story involving Pete and Joey and the plot to reveal Santa's true plans to the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
The Wheel of Time (2023): The Great Hunt #1

Nov 24, 2023

Overall. I quite enjoyed this first issue, but am hoping for more from the series. Much like the TV series of the Wheel of Time, the narrative can be a tad slow as various plots get set up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Trinity (2016) #1

Sep 24, 2016

It will be interesting to see where this goes in the other issues, which are to come. But for me it is the art work that kept my attention throughout this. Nothing wrong with the writing as such. I just wanted something to happen.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Turok (2019) #1

Jan 7, 2019

I'm invested enough right now to give the second issue a go when it releases next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Turok (2019) #2

Feb 25, 2019

OverallThis is a fairly confident second issue, which advances the story and leaves us with an intriguing enough cliffhanger to entice us back for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Union Jack the Ripper: Blood Hunt (2024) #1

May 26, 2024

Overall a great first issue in which we get a great anti-hero or a reluctant hero in the form of Union Jack.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Union Jack the Ripper: Blood Hunt (2024) #2

Jul 14, 2024

We get some great exchanges between the focal characters and at one point Edward claims that the vampires are just representative of what most of the British have always been like beneath the etiquette. Thankfully that isn't the case. But it sure opens up an interesting discussion.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Union Jack the Ripper: Blood Hunt (2024) #3

Jul 17, 2024

Overall. This has been a great three-issue run for Union Jack and I hope to see him again in future comics with some of the other UK-based Marvel Heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Vampirella: Roses for the Dead #1

Jun 28, 2018

Vampirella Roses For The Dead is available now in all good comics stores.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Vampirella: Roses for the Dead #2

Oct 24, 2018

OverallA solid issue, which establishes the relationship between Evily and Vampirella as the bond over a common course. We get a nice mix of humor and action as the Vampire and the Witch go on their manhunt.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Vampirella: The Dark Powers #1

Dec 16, 2020

Overall. This is a solid start to a new and fun adventure that will hopefully visit all of the worlds that the heroes come from.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Vampirella: The Dark Powers #2

Jan 26, 2021

OverallHaving never read much Vampirella. The Dark Powers is very much my introduction to her. First off. I really like how she views herself as an outsider and can easily relate due to personally being among the 20% of people on this Earth who is Neurally Divergent from the rest of society. So in that sense, I can really relate to Vampirella and her tendency to go off and do stuff her way.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Van Helsing: Vampire Hunter (2024) #1

Jan 23, 2024

OverallThis first issue is a great jumping-on point for those like myself who have never read about Liesel Van Helsing. I loved the brief origin story at the start of the book, which showed the fate of Abraham Van Helsing, who is the famed Vampire Hunter that we have come to know and love from countless Dracula films.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Van Helsing: Vampire Hunter (2024) #2

Mar 4, 2024

Pat Shand does a great job of continuing the story and moving the plot along. We get left with a brilliant cliffhanger in which we learn that at least one member of Liesel's team has not been turned and has shown up to give her a hand with the nasty vampires.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Van Helsing: Vampire Hunter (2024) #3

Apr 3, 2024

A Fantastic story, which I'd be tempted to pick up if it gets released as a graphic novel in the coming months.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Venom (2021) #1

Nov 14, 2021

Al Ewing writes a pretty solid opening issue here and provides lots of little plot threads for us to mull over. I particularly liked how he introduces Dylan and his talking cat. The way he has Eddie describe what it is like to control the symbionts is brilliant. I loved that he called the four that he used the most John, Paul, Ringo, and George, and kind of personalizing them. But the question that nags at me is where is Venom. What's happened to him.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Venom (2021) #2

Dec 7, 2021

This issue was much less chaotic than the last issue, but at the same time, the pacing was rather slow to a point where the action beats at the end felt much more staged than they needed to be. I'm also having a little difficulty in accepting or finding anything about Dylan Brock that I can relate to. Hopefully, that will change over the course of the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Venom (2021) #3

Dec 28, 2021

OverallAnother solid issue, which adds a few more layers to the story and brings us a little closer to the conspiracy. Additionally, we also get some great internal dialogue from the Venom Symbiote about the problems it is having when it comes to a lack of a bond with Eddies son. This winds up being a nice bit of foreshadowing for a moment in which he confronts Eddies son when he is told to stay behind.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Venom (2021) #4

Jan 23, 2022

A pretty solid issue that looks like it's leading to something awfully big.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Windhaven #1

Oct 15, 2018

Released through Titan Comics in the UK. Windhaven is available to buy at any good bookstore or online shop for 19.99. It would make a good Christmas present for fans of George R.R. Martin and Lisa Tuttle.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Wolfenstein #1

Sep 13, 2017

I think those fans of the game, who actually paid attention to the story will likely enjoy this as much as the none gamers do. I can't wait to the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Wolfenstein #2

Oct 9, 2017

Wolfenstein issue 2 goes on sale on 11 October and is well worth a look irrespective of if you are a fan of the game or not.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Wonder Woman '77 #27

Sep 17, 2016

With a movie of ‘Wonder Woman' due out next year. This is a great time to check this comic out for what I suspect is a lighter and more fun take on the iconic character.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Wonder Woman (2023) #14

Oct 26, 2024

OverallStorywise this is a bit disjointed in parts and perhaps relies a little to much on readers knowing about some of the more esoteric myths that are built into the Wonder Woman story. All that said. The book does eventually make sense of things and does leave things in such a way that it creates a new jumping on point for newer readers looking to check out the book.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Wonder Woman (2023) #15

Nov 26, 2024

The segment featuring Steve Trevor in Elysium was also a standout. His struggle to find happiness in the afterlife, despite the comforts around him, is deeply moving. You can't help but feel for him and the heartache he's clearly experiencing from being separated from his true love.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
X-Men '92: House of XCII #1

Apr 16, 2022

A serviceable opening issue that does a reasonable job of setting the story up.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Men '92: House of XCII #2

Jun 9, 2022

A solid second issue that does a wonderful job of recapturing the look and feel of the 1992 animated series, which many people continue to love to this day.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
X-Men '92: House of XCII #3

Aug 9, 2022

A fun stand-alone story to break things up a little. I look forward to next month when the next chapter will be unleashed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Xena: Warrior Princess (2018) #1

Feb 14, 2018

Overall. This is a fantastic first issue and a great introduction and leaping on point for those that are not familiar with the characters or the television show. Which can only be a good thing for the Xena fanbase, which to this day remains extremely loyal.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Xena: Warrior Princess (2018) #2

Mar 13, 2018

Overall. A really solid second issue with some comedic antics involving some cyclop'sthat thought they were going to get a royal meal. I look forward to what this team brings us in the third issue next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Xena: Warrior Princess (2018) #3

Apr 17, 2018

This was a great issue with lots of character development for the two leads. I'm still very much invested in seeing where this goes and look forward to the fourth issue, which will be released next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Xena: Warrior Princess (2018) #4

May 8, 2018

A great issue, which just goes by way too fast. It's kind of difficult for me to have to come to terms with the fact that I have to wait a whole month for issue five. To quote Jack Baur. Damn it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Xena: Warrior Princess (2018) #5

Jun 13, 2018

We end on a good note with the prisoner's going free, but it also ends on a note where Xena is having to take responsibilityfor her past actions and journey out to try and find and hopefully help Callisto find peace.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Xena: Warrior Princess (2018) #6

Jul 13, 2018

This is mostly the setup issue, but the fact that I'm already feeling connected to Nazar is damn good writing on the part of Schultz. I look forward to seeing where all of this goes in next months issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Xena: Warrior Princess (2018) #7

Aug 7, 2018

Overall. This issue moves the story along nicely. And with Nazar under the protection of the Amazons. It is now down to Xena and Gabrielle to go back and find her parents and put a stop to the Oracle.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Xena: Warrior Princess (2018) #8

Sep 25, 2018

As have said once before. I never really followed Xena all that much when it was on the air during the 90's, but as a casual viewer of the show, I think the team at Dynamite comics have done a wonderful job of capturing the feel of the series. And this last story arc has really built on that.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Xena: Warrior Princess (2019) #1

Apr 17, 2019

I loved the premise of the Goddess Discord holding the village hostage by threatening to take the children. And the closing page offers up an excellent cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Xena: Warrior Princess (2019) #2

May 20, 2019

This issue ends in a great place with some interesting set up for things that may lay ahead for the God of Discord.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Xena: Warrior Princess (2019) #3

Jun 12, 2019

A fun issue with a lot of action and some fantastic dialogue between the various characters. I also have to give letterer Ariana Maher for having come up with some nice symbols for the native language of the various tribes that Xena interacts with.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Xena: Warrior Princess (2019) #4

Jul 9, 2019

A really nice story, that really explores the power of a good story and how certain beliefs can be molded.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Xena: Warrior Princess (2019) #5

Aug 14, 2019

Overall. A wonderful issue. I wonder where they will wind up next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Xena: Warrior Princess (2019) #6

Sep 17, 2019

A satisfying way of wrapping this up. I hope to see Discord again in future issues. She was fun to have around.

View Issue       View Full Review

Reviews for the Week of...

December

November

More